Home

INTERACTIVE UNIX System V/386 R3.2 Ten Plus User

1. usr larry quiksell sample INSERT 2 Select Housekeep The message Executing House keep will appear in a popup box and your keyboard will be locked while the system removes the history from all struc tured files in your directories removes all and bak files in your directories and removes HOME putdir 3 When Housekeep has completed a popup box with the message No output from Housekeep wil appear 90 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 This is the default system message for programs that do not have output CANCEL to remove the popup box Use MENU again and select Display history of current file A new History of file form will appear History of file usr larry quiksell sample User Modification Time larry Fri Mar 11 14 20 48 1988 HISTORY MODE INSERT Line Note that only one version of the file now exists all history has been removed If you create many structured files this option should be run when you are not using the system since the procedure can be somewhat time consuming If you wish to remove the history from an individual file rather than from all structured files in your directories it is possible to do so manually See rmhist 1 6 5 Structured Nontext Files So far you have used the History Display with structured text files You can also use the History Display with another type of struc tured file a structured nontext file Your editorprf file is an example
2. 3 Use SAVE a third time You now have four different ver sions of the sample file Remember that the original blank file is considered to be a version 6 3 Accessing the History of a File Because you have created several versions of the sample file you can now view its history 1 Use MENU Many Fortune 1000 companies have already discovered that QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY a and accurate New Task Menu Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Show home directory Execute UNIX shell commands Run a shell command in a box Show your profiles directory Edit your editor profile Housekeep Display history of current file d m usr larry quiksell sample INSERT 86 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 2 Select the option Display history of current file A form similar to the one shown below will list the versions of the file Histor User y of file Mod usr larry quiksell sample ification Time Ins Del larry larry larry larry Mar Mar Mar Mar 13 33 59 1988 13 35 25 1988 13 37 02 1988 13 37 38 1988 HISTORY MODE INSERT Lo Line This is the History of file form The form shows the name of the user who edited the file the date and time the editing session started and the number of lines or records in a structured nontext file
3. PAGE 28 29 pick buffer 19 pick buffer moving copies from 21 pick buffer removing text from 21 PICK COPY 20 25 28 PICK UP 19 25 28 PICK UP cursor defined 19 picking lines 34 PREVIOUS 16 PRINT 15 Print Helper capabilities 3 Print Helper using 3 Print Menu 15 print profile 16 printing 15 Profile Helper capabilities 3 Profile Helper using 3 putdir directory 7 9 putdir restoring a directory from 9 putdir restoring a file from 7 PUT COPY 19 21 25 PUT DOWN 19 21 25 QUIT 5 QUOTE 24 readfile 43 recovery 35 REFRESH 25 removing a directory 9 removing boxes 15 renaming a directory 9 renaming a file 7 REPLACE 22 replace function 32 replacing a string 32 RESTORE 20 25 31 32 restoring a directory 9 restoring a file 7 RIGHT 13 24 29 rmhist 43 rpl 32 running text region 29 SAVE 17 35 saving a file 5 saving a structured file 5 saving an ASCII file 5 saving file versions 10 SEARCH 21 SEARCH 22 search and replace 22 search canceling 22 search interrupting 14 searching for a string 21 sentence copying 29 sentence deleting 29 sentence moving 29 sentence opening 29 SET TAB 11 24 sort filter 34 sorting lines 34 spaces leading 36 spaces trailing 36 splitting a line 18 19 string deleting 32 string replacing 32 structured data editing 16 structured file 4 structured file restoring text from 25 structured file saving 5 17 structured file viewi
4. 2 Use to move to the end of the file then type the last paragraph shown below Notice that the text wraps at the new margin Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the mark These are inexpensive condos whose biggest selling point is their cheap price and impressive list of standard features They re really a first home investment not the type a buyer would plan to live in for more than 2 3 years We ve got to go for the first time buyer convince him that this is the opportunity he s been waiting for to make the jump from renter to homeowner He couldn t care less about how long the home will last He wants a lifestyle and a low down payment usr larry report INSERT Line 3 to the seventh tab stop and use ENTER MARGIN 4 Press the ENTER key and continue typing Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the mark These are inexpensive condos whose biggest selling point is their cheap price and impressive list of standard features They re really a first home investment not the type a buyer would plan to live in for more than 2 3 years We ve got to go for the first time buyer convince him that this is the opportunity he s been waiting for to make the jump from renter to homeowner He couldn t care less about how long the home will last He wants a lifestyle and a low down payment I say we go with a headline that expands this mess
5. BREAK Interrupt a search or a filter No effect No effect No effect CANCEL Remove an error message or popup Removes box Removes box Removes box box from the screen CENTER Center current line between ERROR margins X is positive Center X lines Center all lines within the box or line region DELETE Delete CCL Note 3 Deleted Delete the right part of the CCL start X is positive Delete X lines starting Delete lines or block defined by text is available with RESTORE ing at the cursor position replacing it with CCL Deleted text is available cursor Deleted text is available with the line below CCL Deleted text with RESTORE with RESTORE is available with RESTORE l ERROR means that an error will be indicated by either the sound of the bell or by an explicit error message 2 When an error message results from using ENTER motion FUNCTION you might need to use CANCEL twice the first CANCEL removes the error message and the second CANCELs the ENTER motion sequence 3 CCL stands for Current Cursor Line v xipueddy z z eseejay enuey eoue4eJeu SNTd NIL SNOILONn3 SNId NIL 3O AHVWIWnS ZE fonts Initial current font is Roman alternate is continuous underline J current font to Roman with no under alternate font set current font as line are c w or g continuous or word underline or graphics
6. 2 T 4 e CTRL g on the keyboard CTRL on the keyboard CTRL a then h on the keyboard 8 on the numeric keypad INSERT MODE CTRL a then i on the keyboard CTRL a then 1 on the keyboard CTRL k on the keyboard on the numeric keypad PF4 above the numeric keypad 3 el i E 5E m z zi S 5 o mp m H B 5 e LINE FEED on the right of the keyboard c e le gt T MENU PF2 above the numeric keypad 18 z XT WINDOW PAGE PAGE PRINT Ql KS cl id M l Po THOTH E i o gt z o al c o Z Z IQ 25 ac 5 z dE Te s z J SET amp A ra TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 CTRL a then m on the keyboard PF 1 above the numeric keypad CTRL n on the keyboard CTRL a then n on the keyboard 9 on the numeric keypad PF3 above the numeric keypad 1 on the numeric keypad 4 on the numeric keypad CTRL a then p on the keyboard CTRL p on the keyboard 2 on the numeric keypad 5 on the numeric keypad CTRL Von the keyboard CTRL a then q on the keyboard CTRL z on the keyboard CTRL r on the keyboard CTRL v on the keyboard RETURN on the right of the keyboard CTRL 1 on the keyboard CTRL a then s on the keyboard 3 on the numeric keypad 6 on the numeric keypad CTRL a then v on the keyboard TAB on the left of the keyboard CTRL t on the keyboard CTRL a then t on the keyboard CTRL u on the keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 WINDOW CTRL w on the k
7. File name report already exists Press CANCEL to abort file restore or enter a new name usr larry INSERT Line 3 Use HELP for additional information about the messages in popup boxes on your screen INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project report First Report on the QuikSell Project You are trying to restore a file into a directory that already contains a file by that name You can type in a different name or type CANCEL to abort the restore usr larry INSERT Line 4 Use to remove the popup box Since file names must be unique type a new file name 58 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project report First Report on the QuikSell Project File name report already exists Press CANCEL to abort file restore or enter a new name test usr larry INSERT Line 5 Use EXECUTE The copy is renamed as specified INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description
8. Release 2 2 The options Execute UNIX shell commands and Run a shell command in a box allow you to communicate with your system The options Show your profiles directory and Edit your editor profile allow you to customize your profiles The option Housekeep provides an easy way to remove history from structured files and remove unwanted files from your directories The option Show history of current file allows you to view the history of the file that is currently displayed if the current file is structured These options are discussed in the following paragraphs 5 12 1 Executing a Command From the Editor Subshell The TEN PLUS system eliminates most of the requirements for communicating directly with the system by allowing you to perform tasks with functions instead of commands However there are many available system commands in the TEN PLUS environment provides two methods of communicating with the system The first one allows you to run a command from the editor subshell l Select the option Execute UNIX shell commands The display will clear and the editor subshell prompt will appear near the top left of your screen Execute UNIX shell commands Touch CNTL D to continue editing eshell You are now at the editor subshell level and you can type commands to the system The date 1 command causes the system to display the current date and time 2 Type date then press the ENTER key TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2
9. Appendix C BOX CHARACTER SET Box characters can be entered from the editor by using the graphics font or QUOTE To create a box character either enter the graph ics font by using g FONT or use QUOTE and type the letter that corresponds to the character you want Graphics Font QUOTE Character Box Character s upper left hand corner left hand intersection of two corners lower left hand corner horizontal line top intersection of two corners central intersection of four corners bottom intersection of two corners upper right hand corner right hand intersection of two corners vertical line lower right hand corner QHeROAKRN TOA ME Some terminals support a graphics character set to represent box characters Others use standard keyboard characters to represent box characters On displays that support graphics characters the standard box characters in the graphics font and their correspond ing keys are rs q T 4 tw T qe a lj Jo TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 47 Appendix D ERROR MESSAGES This appendix provides a glossary that defines terms used in error messages generated by the editor It also explains each error mes sage and gives suggestions for correcting each error situation The editor displays each error message in a popup box on the screen Most frequently error messages result when you use a func tion that is not valid in the current context or when you attempt to perform a
10. Moves the cursor to the upper left hand corner of the current window Moves to the next tab position to the right TAB or to the left TAB TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 111 thereby erasing them BEGIN LINE Moves the cursor to the first nonblank character on the current line BACKSPACE Corrects typing errors by backspacing over BEGIN LINE END LINE Moves the cursor immediately to the right of the last nonblank character on the current line LINE FEED Positions the cursor at the beginning of the next line of a form 4 TAB SETTING RELEASING FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES SET TAB Sets a tab at the cursor position Removes the tab if any at the cursor position 5 TEXT MANIPULATION FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES Sets a left hand margin at the cursor position Sets a right hand margin at the cursor position Sets left and right hand margins Sets the left hand margin at the cursor location where defining began and sets the right hand margin at the cursor location where defining ended FORMAT Reformats text from the cursor position to the end of the paragraph according to the margins indicated on the display ENTER c FONT Selects continuous underscore font ENTER w FONT Selects word underscore font ENTER FONT Selects nonunderscore font ENTER x FONT Selects Roman font equivalent to ENTER FONT 112 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 ENTER g FONT Selects graphic
11. removes the last deleted line or area from the wastebasket buffer and places it in the file at the current cursor position A numeric argument can be used with to indi cate the number of copies of the last deleted line or area to be inserted at the cursor location In situations where text deleted early in a session must be recovered use until the missing text is moved from the buffer to the display Or if the file is a structured file the previous version can be retrieved using the History Display 2 2 4 4 All text deleted during an editing session is saved in a file named Although this file cannot be altered it can be used to retrieve deleted text by using ENTER USE then using PICK COPY to recover the deleted text 7 20 Using FUNCTIONS The ten basic functions included with the TEN PLUS system are banir E LOCALMENU INSERT INSERT PICK COPY PUT COPY PUT DOWN FORMAT and Each of these functions can only be used in certain situations and consequently only a subset of these functions may be active at any given time displays the set of functions that are currently active On some systems more than ten func tions may be displayed For example when editing a File Manager display is not displayed by because you cannot use while viewing a File Manager display The complete Functions Menu typically looks like this 26 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Functions Menu Move the cursor
12. 1 GLOSSARY 2 ERROR MESSAGES Appendix B UTILITY PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURED iii 43 45 47 47 48 fm TEN PLUS Reference Manual 1 INTRODUCTION This is a reference manual for the TEN PLUS system and the INed editor It is intended for those who have already used the TEN PLUS system to create edit and manage text files It is not designed to teach these procedures to users who have never used them Readers of this manual should have already read the TEN PLUS Tutorial which contains an introduction to the features of both the TEN PLUS system and the INed editor Refer to your user s manual for more detailed information about available UNIX System commands 1 1 Accessing TEN PLUS Functions Accessing TEN PLUS functions requires different keystroke sequences on different keyboards Refer to the appropriate section of TEN PLUS Keyboard Information for an alphabetic listing of the TEN PLUS functions and the keystroke sequences required for your keyboard 2 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 2 TEN PLUS SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2 1 Components and Capabilities The TEN PLUS User Interface consists of five components the INed editor the File Manager the Profile Helper the Print Helper and the History Display These are used to create edit and manage text files Together they provide a bridge to the UNIX System allowing users to perform basic UNIX System functions without having to learn a lengthy set of
13. 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project test First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line 6 Change the descriptive information using ENTER DELETE CHARACTER to remove extra characters TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 59 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description Calendar My Incoming Messages Company Telephone Book Company Policies First Report on the QuikSell Project Test File usr larry INSERT Line 7 You now have two copies of your report file one called report and one called test ZOOM IN to your new test file if you wish to verify that it contains the same infor mation as your report file 5 2 Renaming Files You can rename a file by typing over the current file name 1 Switch to overwrite mode by using INSERT MODE then change the name of the test file to copy by typing over the name 2 Use INSERT MODE to switch back to insert mode 5 3 Deleting Files There are two ways to delete a file PICK UP and DELETE PICK UP and DELETE can also be used with BOX MARK or ENTER motion to delete multiple files deletes a file and places it in the pick buffer removes the file from the pick buffer and replaces it in your directory You will use to move a file from one directory to another in 95 7
14. FILE The second command pipes the output through print sets the title on the header page to the name of the file currently being edited FILE then prompts for print options The third command prompts for a file name and overwrites the specified file with the output If the redirection symbols are followed by a file name the system automaticaly prints to the specified file The fourth command prompts for a file name and appends the output to the specified file You can explore any of the options listed at the top level of the print profile by using ZOOM IN 3 3 Print Option Details When you ZOOM IN to an option listed at the top level of the print profile the details for the option appear on the display For exam ple when you to the first option Print on default printer the screen display looks like this Details of Print Option Description shown in menu Command Prine on default printer print t1s FILE Description for popbox Printing on the default printer Flags any non space character means true Save all ASCII files Print graphics box use w printer filter Clear screen and run command Display all output of command The first two fields Description shown in menu and Com mand display the detail from the top level of the profile The Description for popbox field is used to enter the text that will appear in a popbox when the command is executing it can con tain any of the editor environment v
15. Search forward or backward for Search forward or backward for ERROR SEARCH for the last string searched for the string pointed to by the cursor up to the string X the first blank ___ t SET TAB Set tab stop at cursor column Remove tab stop at cursor column ERROR TAB Move the cursor to the next tab Enter BOX LINE mode define ajERROR Continue defining argument TAB stop right TAB or left TAB region to the next tab stop TEXT MARK Enter TEXT mode ERROR ERROR ERROR USE Switch window to alternate file Edit file taking name from cursor posi Edit file named X as current file old current file becomes alternate file tion up to next blank old current file current file becomes alternate file becomes alternate file Make a new window containing Delete all windows except the one con Make a new window and edit file X in current file with border extending taining the cursor i from current cursor position ZOOM IN Display more detailed information ZOOM OUT Display more summary informa tion cr ez eseojoy jenueyy eoueJejeu SNTd NIL TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 43 Appendix B UTILITY PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURED FILES Programs described in this appendix are useful for manipulating the structured files described in 2 2 To run these programs use and select the option Execute UNIX shell com mands This will cause the editor to move
16. The plus and star operations are equivalent to th and 0 respectively TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 rpl 1 rpl 1 Parentheses are used for grouping An operator e g can work on a single character or a regular expression enclosed in parentheses For example a cb s Of necessity all the above defined symbols are special Therefore if they are to be used as themselves the and must be escaped by preceding each of them with a X Also to avoid conflicts with shell special characters it is a good idea to enclose the expr in single quotes when it is other than a simple text string Example rpl A Za z A Za z0 9 0 5 xxx This example will replace a string of up to six alphanumeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic with the string xxx To delete a string using rpl replace it by the null string SEE ALSO e 1 regex 3x TEN PLUS Reference Manual DIAGNOSTICS If lines are longer than 256 characters if two arguments are not given or if the first argument is the null string rpl exits with status 2 TEN PLUS User Interface 2 Release 2 2 sortsf 1 Base sortsf 1 NAME sortsf sort a structured data file SYNOPSIS sortsf bdfinrv field field file DESCRIPTION The sortsf utility sorts records in a TEN PLUS structured file accord ing to the specified field Field is a TEN PLUS path name If
17. a structured file etc termcap terminal capability database SEE ALSO e 1 tdigest 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 tdigest 1 Base tdigest 1 NAME tdigest digest the terms files SYNOPSIS tdigest inputfile outputfile DESCRIPTION FILES Tdigest converts the terminal description entries in the structured inputfile into binary entries in outputfile as required for efficient usage by the INed termcap editor Upon startup the editor checks the TDESC environment variable to determine the pathname of the binary description file that should be read If the TDESC variable is not set the editor checks to see if the SYS variable is set If SYS is set the editor reads SYS termcap terms bin If SYS is not set then the editor looks in the default system wide description file usr lib INed termcap terms bin This mechanism allows for the testing of a new binary terminal description file prior to making it available to the general user community usr lib INed termcap def trm terminal descriptions a structured file usr lib INed termcap terms bin the digested terminal descriptions file a binary file SEE ALSO e 1 tconvert 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 versions 1 Base versions 1 NAME versions print out modification dates in an INed structured file SYNOPSIS versions file DESCRIPTION Versions prints out the modification dates from a structured file These are the
18. but hunt is not Brackets can be used to indicate a range For example ls draft 1 5 lists all files within a directory that begin with the letters draft and end with 1 2 3 4 or 5 so that files named draft1 or draft3 are listed but draft7 is not e 8 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Appendix TEN PLUS FUNCTIONS This appendix describes the capabilities of the TEN PLUS functions and sequences Refer to the TEN PLUS Reference Manual for additional information about these functions and sequences 1 CONTROL AND MENU FUNCTIONS Invokes system commands from within the edi tor when used with ENTER com mand places output in the current file replacing text from the cursor line to the end of paragraph ENTER Modifies the capabilities of most functions Used in conjunction with or MENU it invokes system commands from within the TEN PLUS Environment EXECUTE Invokes functions that appear in menus or help popup boxes Used in conjunction with the cursor positioning functions to indicate the desired function CANCEL Removes comment instruction help or other popup boxes BREAK Stops a SEARCH or SEARCH or a com mand started via EXECUTE HELP Displays additional help instructions relating to the editor or to the comments in the current popup box Often used in conjunction with EXECUTE ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT for more detail on a particular subject ENU Accesses non editor functions
19. is invoked by holding down Shift then touching the TAB key Hold down the Ctr1 key then touch the designated key For example LINE FEED is invoked by holding down Ctr1 then touching j To log out from the system level hold down the Ctrl key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes Shift F1 on the top row of keys Shift F2 on the top row of keys Shift F3 on the top row of keys Shift F4 on the top row of keys Shift F5 on the top row of keys Shift F6 on the top row of keys Shift F7 on the top row of keys Shift F8 on the top row of keys to the left of the numeric keypad or on the numeric keypad to the left of the numeric keypad or on the numeric keypad p E 8g s s t 55 to the left of the numeric keypad or on the numeric keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 5 to the left of the numeric keypad or on the numeric keypad BACKSPACE Backspace on the main keyboard S BEGIN LINE Alt 4 on the numeric keypad BOX M Alt b on the main keyboard Break to the right on the top row of keys in the upper right corner of the numeric keypad CENTER Alt c on the main keyboard a fs z gt m 1 E e e E E EB z Alt Del on the numeric keypad DELETE CHARACTER Del on the numeric keypad Alt x on the main keyboard Alt 6 on the numeric keypad BD 5 ENTER to the right of the numeric keypad xn XECUTE to the right of the numeric keypad Alt d on the main key
20. it wraps around and moves to the opposite border When the cursor is on the last line of the window and the key is used the screen scrolls one line This allows text to be entered con tinuously at the end of a file without having to move the window to bring in new lines Practice positioning the cursor within the window by using the func tions described above Use each function until you are comfortable with it 2 6 Using Menus Many operations in the TEN PLUS environment are simplified through the use of menus To select an option from a menu that appears on your screen either position the cursor on the desired option and use EXECUTE or use any of the functions 1 through 8 depending on the number that corresponds to the line on which your choice is listed For example to select Create a struc tured file with history from the file creation menu use 2 since this is the second option on that menu 2 7 Using FUNCTIONS The ten basic functions included with the TEN PLUS environment INSERT are MENU LOCAL MENU SERT PICK COPY PUT COPY PICK UP PUT DOWN FORMAT ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT Each of these functions can only be used in certain situations and consequently only a subset of these functions may be active at any given time displays the set of functions that are currently active On some systems more than ten func tions may be displayed For example when editing an ASCII file does not
21. that were inserted deleted or changed To see a particular version of the file on the line describing that version With the cursor on the third line ZOOM IN to see the third version of the sample file Many Fortune 1000 companies have already discovered that QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY Software tools for the sales industry that provide a revolutionary approach to sales from the QuikSell Corporation HISTORY MODE INSERT Line TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 87 6 3 1 The History Display Local Menu for the History Display provides access to several special options for working with versions of a file You can use while viewing a version of a file to print the time of the version in a popup box show the next version show the previous version redisplay the History of file form or save the version Use LOCAL MENU to see the History Display Options ered that History Display Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information 1 show time of this version of the file 2 show next time 3 show previous time 4 redisplay history 5 save current version of file HISTORY MODE INSERT Line Option 1 displays the last modification time of the current ver sion in a popup box You can select this option instead of using to view the modification time on the History of file form U
22. the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so good This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the mark These are inexpensive condos whose biggest selling point is their cheap usr larry report INSERT Line 1 53 2 Use CANCEL to remove the popup box 3 Use ENTER GO TO to go to the end of the file 4 Use date to run the date command and print the results in the file Because you are at the end of the file the output is inserted without replacing existing text If you wish to insert the output in the middle of a file without replac ing text use to open blank lines at the desired loca tion before running the command 5 ZOOM OUT 8 3 Exiting the TEN PLUS Environment Up to this point the discussions in this tutorial have focused on using the TEN PLUS system to perform basic system and editor TEN PLUS Tutorial
23. 15 text inserting 23 text inserting space for 15 text overwriting 23 text searching 23 text searching backwards 23 USE function 24 usingmenus 18 word wrap 3 ZOOM IN 4 ZOOM OUT 4 TEN PLUS Tutorial CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1 1 Scope of This Tutorial 1 2 Overview of This Tutorial 4 1 3 Accessing TEN PLUS Functions GETTING STARTED 2 Logging In 2 2 Using MENU to Rete to Your Hons Directory 2 3 Creating a File m Er MEO 2 4 Using the Keyboard 2 5 Using the Cursor and W ndow Bositioning Functions 2 6 Using Menus 2 7 Using FUNCTIONS gs 2 8 Using the TEN PLUS ENTER Function 2 9 Using the RU HELP and CANCEL Functions 2 10 Exiting a File 2 11 Accessing Existing Files 2 12 Logging Out TYPING AND FORMATTING DEOS NSUES 3 1 Changing the Left Hand Margin 3 22 Changing the Right Hand Margin for Word Wrap 3 3 Changing Both Margins Simultaneously 3 4 Readjusting Lines on New Margins 3 5 Centering Text S AN a 3 6 Changing Tab Stops 3 7 Underscoring With FONT BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 4 1 Deleting Characters or Words Within a Line 4 2 Adding Characters c Or Words Within a Line 4 3 Correcting Transpositions and Typographical Baers 4 4 Moving Windows So 4 a we ua de 4 5 Deleting or Moving Lines 4 5 1 Using DELETE CONMNR 4 UW m tA fA tA CA 1A tA AN Hj 0 20 tn I C00 t9 4 5 2 Using PICK UP z Adding Blank Lines and Sp
24. 5 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies usr larry INSERT Line Note that screens may vary on different displays If your screen does not look similar to this one your cursor should be located to the right of a system prompt typically a Type e and then press the key to enter the TEN PLUS environment 2 2 Using MENU to Return to Your Home Directory If at any time you get lost in the TEN PLUS environment you can use to return to your home directory provides an easy way to perform actions that would otherwise require more effort When you use MENU a menu of options appears Position the cursor on the desired option then use to perform the indicated operation or to remove the menu The list of menu options is installation dependent and can be overridden by a user in his editor profile file Refer to TEN PLUS Profiles for more information about customizing your editor profile file To use to return to your home directory 1 Use MENU 6 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar New Task Menu Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to
25. Base fBill 1 NAME ffill fjust fill and justify arbitrarily formatted text using INed SYNOPSIS ffill In fjust In DESCRIPTION i Ffill is a filter that reads text from the standard input file fills each paragraph and writes the result on the standard output file It indents the first and second lines of each paragraph exactly as they are indented in the input file and all subsequent lines in the paragraph are indented to match the second line Thus even block paragraphs with hanging labels on the first line are correctly formatted Multiple spaces and tabs within a line are converted to single spaces An extra space is inserted after each word ending with a period exclamation mark and question mark Ffill is designed for interactive text processing with the function of the INed editor see e 1 treating a blank line as the end of the current paragraph With INed it is possible to free format a para graph beginning the first two lines with the proper indentations and then using ffill to fill the entire paragraph Alternatively the user may edit already filled paragraphs and then refill the text Fjust is also a filter normally invoked with the function of the INed editor It reads text from the standard input file fills and justi fies each paragraph and writes the result on the standard output file Fjust is identical to ffill except that it justifies each line to produce an aligned right margin This is a
26. Code for Information Interchange Most programs such as com pilers expect data in this form Structured files while not directly usable with most UNIX System commands can be converted easily to ASCII files refer to Appendix B Structured files contain information about the structure of the data in the file Structured files also contain information about how the file was created so that a user can recover previous versions For ASCII files only one previous version is kept in a bak file His tory is kept more compactly in a structured file and changes to large structured files can usually be stored more quickly after edit ing than changes in large ASCII files However unless history is periodically removed a structured file will become much larger than the corresponding ASCII file over a lifetime of editing A number of programs are useful for managing structured files These programs are described in Appendix B 2 3 Initializing the TEN PLUS System A successful login initializes the TEN PLUS system when the sys tem is configured to enter directly into the TEN PLUS environment If the File Manager screen does not appear after login type e HOME and press the key to initialize the TEN PLUS system This also initializes the editor The editor starts up in insert mode with the cursor in the top left hand corner of the window The procedures for using the INed edi tor to modify files are described in detail in 86 7 8 an
27. Condos 3 Continue using SEARCH When all occurrences of a string have been found the system responds with the message Search failed on string Condos Use to remove the message 4 GO TO the beginning of the file and search for the word condos by using ENTER condos SEARCH Note that for search purposes Condos and condos are two different words A search for one does not locate the other 5 the beginning of the file then look for an occurrence of the string ondos Note that the system finds the string in both Condos and condos Itis not necessary to type com plete words only the portion that makes the character string unique is necessary 4 19 Performing Individual Search and Replace At times you may want to replace many but not all instances of a word or words with another word or words This is possible by put ting the replacement string in the replace buffer This buffer is associated with REPLACE To replace a string with another string 1 Search for the word or string to be replaced by using ENTER string SEARCH The word or string is put in the search buffer and the search is initiated 2 When an occurrence of the string to be replaced is located by the system use ENTER replacement string REPLACE The 52 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 replacement string is put in the replace buffer and the replace ment occurs 3 Use SEARCH to continue searching for the string to be r
28. Files the Editor Should Watch Name of file Message to display Program to run HOME smail You have new mail SYS bin newmail HOME s SHOME reminder SYS bin showrem d The first sample entry monitors your incoming mail if your incom ing mail is put in HOME smail When the editor discovers that the file has changed the editor displays the message You have new mail in a popup box then runs the newmail pro gram The newmail program displays the header lines of the new mail in a popup box You can use mail or the mail helper to read your new messages The second sample entry monitors the reminder file When the edi tor discovers that the file HOME reminder has changed the showrem program runs and displays the contents of the HOME reminder file in a popup box 2 6 Editor Search Paths The Editor Search Paths option at the top level of the editor profile is used for specifying the search paths that the editor uses to find forms helpers messages and scripts If you to this option you will see TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 9 Editor Search Paths This section is used to specify the places the editor should look for forms and helpers Each line in each box should be the name of a directory the directories are searched from top to botton N Forms Helpers SSYS S LANG forms 8YS halpern Messages Scripts SYS LANG hmgs SYS LANG Scripts To make your own forms directory insert a line at the
29. Helper Options Synchronize the index file with the directory x Directory for deleted files HOME putdir usr larry profiles indexprf INSERT Line If you wish to change any of the defaults shown in the sample indexprf file above you must create an indexprf file in your HOME profiles directory and edit the file If you already have a profiles directory you can access that directory type indexprf in the File field ZOOM IN and select the option to create a structured file If you do not have a profiles directory use ENTER HOME profiles indexprf USE and select the option to create a structured file The system will create a profiles directory then create an indexprf file in that direc tory and display the new indexprf file on your screen The Synchronize option in this section allows you to specify whether your directory listing will be updated that is synchronized with the actual state of the system whenever you create files through filename USE The x in this field specifies that synchronization will take place this is the default Unless there is an x in this field synchronization will not occur In that case files created through filename will not show in the direc tory listing until you manually list them by selecting the File Manager local menu option 1 Display visible files ATN TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 81 The Directory for deleted files option specifies the directory in which the system
30. INed features include text processing paragraph fill right margin justification and global replacement The INed editor can be expanded to include additional user or system provided programs that are invoked interactively from within the editor TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 3 The INed editor provides facilities for recreating previous versions of files In addition if an editing session terminates prematurely the INed editor provides recovery mechanisms 2 1 2 The File Manager The TEN PLUS File Manager allows users to create access move copy and delete files by positioning the cursor and using a specific function It is easy to use the File Manager to perform these opera tions because there are no UNIX System commands or syntax con ventions to remember The File Manager uses the same functions as the INed editor Files are picked up and moved or copied and moved using the same INed functions that perform these operations on lines of text 2 1 3 The Profile Helper The TEN PLUS Profile Helper allows users to customize the editing environment to suit individual needs It can be used to help the edi tor locate forms helpers messages and forms language scripts as well as to add change or delete the options on certain menus The Profile Helper uses forms to build custom menus that simplify operations in the TEN PLUS environment Custom menus allow the user to perform certain routine tasks by selecting optio
31. It is recommended that you use when you wish to move a file from one location to another DELETE removes a file and places it in the wastebasket buffer RESTORE removes the file from the wastebasket buffer and replaces it in your directory It is recommended however that you use DELETE to permanently remove a file 60 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 1 Position the cursor on the line describing the copy file 2 Use DELETE to remove the copy file from your directory INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description Calendar My Incoming Messages Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line 5 4 Path Names and Directory Structure The system identifies you by your user name Similarly the system identifies your files by the file names you assign and stores them in a directory structure filing system that you arrange The name of the directory where you are currently located is indicated at the bot tom left of the File Manager display In our example the name of the current directory is usr larry The name usr larry is also the path name of this directory A path name consists of a followed by one or more directory names separated by s The that begins the path name is the first directory in the directory structure the root directory The last directory name in the se
32. Manual Release 2 2 63 Action To set the right margin move the cursor to a position to the right of the left margin and use ENTER MARGIN You cannot use the DO key ina list field Cause You have tried to use in a field with a tree data path that is a list field can only be used in a field with a text data path Action No action required You do not have execute permission in path directory Cause You are trying to edit a file that is located in a direc tory in which you do not have execute permission Action Change the access permissions if possible or ask your system administrator to do so then try again You do not have write permission in this directory Cause You are trying to edit a file that is located in a direc tory in which you do not have write permission Action Change the access permissions if possible or ask your system administrator to do so then try again TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 65 file 25 accessing a directory 8 accessing a file 6 active window changing 23 alternate file creating 16 alternate file editing 16 area defined by cursor motion 29 area definition of 28 area duplicating 20 area inserting 18 area moving 19 argument cancel 27 argument canceling 27 argument cursor defined 28 29 argument definition of 18 argument displaying last 27 argument errors when typing 27 argument invalid 27 arguments filter 31 arguments to func
33. Messages phone Company Telephone Book at q File Manager r Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information 1 Display visible files 2 Display all files Return to normal directory display 4 Show details about files 5 Show more details about this file Show more details about this file usr larry INSERT Line A dashed line in front of an option indicates that the option is not available in this situation The third and sixth options 70 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 have dashed lines in front of them and are therefore not available in this situation They will become available when you look at details about a particular file or directory as described in step 3 below You have already used options 1 and 2 to display files in your directory listing The other options are described below Return to normal directory display Returns you to the directory display from either the file status information display or the Detailed File Status Information display 4 Show details about files Displays the file status information display for an entire directory 5 Show more details about this file Can be used to view the Detailed File Status Information display for a particular file either from the directory listing or from the the file status information display Show more details abou
34. PICK UP Deletes the defined area and adds it to the pick buffer Deletes the defined portion of the line and adds it to the pick buffer BOX MARK 1 PICK UP Deletes a rectangular area of text and adds it to the pick buffer Deletes the defined area and adds it to the pick buffer ENTER PICK UP Replaces text at and to the right of the cursor with text on the line below the cursor PUT DOWN Places the text most recently added to the pick buffer at the cursor position removing it from the pick buffer DELETE Deletes text and adds it to the wastebasket buffer ENTER n DELETE Deletes the specified number of lines and adds them to the wastebasket buffer 1 DELETE Deletes the defined lines and adds them to the wastebasket buffer 114 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 BOX MARK DELETE Deletes the defined portion of the line and adds it to the wastebasket buffer BOX MARK Deletes a rectangular area of text and adds it to the wastebasket buffer Deletes the defined area and adds it to the wastebasket buffer ENTER DELETE Replaces text at and to the right of the cursor with text on the line below the cursor RESTORE Removes only the most recently DELETE d text from the wastebasket buffer and places it at the cursor position n RESTORE Places the specified number of copies of the most recently DELETE d text at the cursor position PICK COPY Adds a copy of the line a
35. PUT DOWN remains in the buffer Practice deleting and restoring lines using PICK UP 1 Position the cursor on the third line in the file and use PICK UP five times All five lines are removed 1 t t t Preliminary report by Pat I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can 1ife should be so goodl This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the usr larry report INSERT Line 2 Use PUT DOWN five times All five lines are retrieved in revers
36. Release 2 2 99 functions If your system administrator has not arranged for you to automatically log in to the TEN PLUS environment you can exit from TEN PLUS to the UNIX System shell Although it is not usu ally necessary to exit the TEN PLUS environment to perform system functions there may be times when this is desirable The UNIX System shell is accessed by using EXIT EXIT can be used from within a file or from the File Manager display If is used from within a file the file is saved before the system is brought to the command level The command level is indicated by a system prompt Commands to the system are typed at the command level by typing the necessary characters from the keyboard and pressing the key Com mands must be typed accurately or the system will not recognize them Type e HOME to reenter the TEN PLUS environment in your home directory Type e to reenter the TEN PLUS environ ment in the current directory Type e to reenter the TEN PLUS environment in the file you were editing before exiting Exit and reenter the TEN PLUS environment 1 Use EXIT The system displays the system prompt 2 Type date then press the ENTER key The current date and time are printed and the system prompt returns 3 Type e HOME to reenter the TEN PLUS environment in your home directory 8 4 Sorting Columns The sort 1 command is used on ASCII files to sort single spaced lines or columns either alphabetically or n
37. Release Notes March 1990 1 INTRODUCTION We are pleased to provide Release 2 2 5 of the TEN PLUS User Interface This is a new release for the INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System and it runs on Intel 386 and 486 based com puters It is also the first release of the TEN PLUS editor to be bundled with the TEN PLUS Mail System These release notes reflect the changes for the TEN PLUS User Interface only For details on the TEN PLUS Mail System refer to the TEN PLUS Mail System Guide New features of the TEN PLUS User Inter face are documented here and include e Support for job control e New xpcterm support e Inclusion of a TEN PLUS forms compiler e Support for larger screens e Inclusion of a C programming helper e Support for new filters e New utilities for structured files e New terminal descriptions e Translatable help message files These release notes describe the purpose and use of each new feature 2 SUPPORT FOR JOB CONTROL A new feature of the INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System is job control which makes it possible to put a foreground process in the background and return it to the foreground at a later time This facility provides a convenient way to switch between applica tions on the same terminal or screen without having to exit one 2 TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Release 2 2 5 application and enter another one The TEN PLUS editor now properly supports the job control feature To use the job cont
38. TEN PLUS User Interface consists of six components the INed editor the File Manager the Profile Helper the Print Helper the History Display and the C Helper These are used to create edit and manage text files Together they provide a bridge to the INTERACTIVE UNIX System allowing users to perform basic func tions without having to learn a lengthy set of UNIX System commands All functions that can be performed from the UNIX shell can be performed using one of the TEN PLUS User Interface components Since all six components use a system of menus and functions that allow the user to select a desired operation it is rarely necessary to 4 Introduction to the TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 remember a specific UNIX System command The six components of the TEN PLUS User Interface are described below INed Editor INed is a screen oriented text editor that allows users to display and edit text files Users enter and edit text by typing on the display as they would on a typewriter The display contains a window that can be divided into smaller windows for editing and examination of files This feature can be used in conjunction with other functions to pick up text from one file and put it into another file or another portion of the same file The INed editor provides a variety of functions to insert delete and move text on the screen Other INed features include text processing paragraph fill right margin justifica
39. TEXT MARK 2 Press the key through any full lines to be deleted or moved 3 Position the cursor on the first character not to be deleted or moved 4 Use DELETE to remove the block use PICK UP to move the block If DELETE is used the section is placed in the wastebasket buffer Recover text stored in the wastebasket buffer with RESTORE If PICK UP is used the section is placed in the pick buffer Recover text stored in the pick buffer with PUT DOWN Practice using on the report file l the beginning of the file 2 Position the cursor on the I on line 11 and use TEXT MARK 3 Press the key then use to move the cursor to the P in Prominent 4 Use PICK UP Position the cursor at the A on line 12 and use PUT DOWN The sentence is inserted 42 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Preliminary report by Pat I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Pe Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing be tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here
40. This file allows you to modify the behavior of the editor to suit your preferences Put the cursor on the line of interest and ZOOM IN to specify your choice of options MENU Options HELP Options Files the Editor Should Watch Editor Search Paths usr larry profiles editorprf INSERT Line Your system may have additional profile items Refer to 6 for a brief discussion of how to modify the MENU Options section of your editorprf file for more information about this and the other sections of your editorprf file refer to TEN PLUS Profiles 5 12 5 Housekeep The Housekeep option on your New Task Menu runs a housekeep command that removes HOME putdir removes history from all structured files in your directories and removes all and bak files from your directories Note that you cannot restore files from putd ir if they were deleted prior to using this option 5 12 6 Displaying the History of the Current File The Display history of current file option on your New Task Menu displays a list of previous versions of the current file if the current file is structured This list can be used to view or restore previous versions see 6 80 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 5 13 The File Manager Profile The File Manager has its own profile file that allows you to custom ize your directory listing This profile file is called indexprf This display shows the indexprf file with the system defaults Directory
41. To access a different directory use the procedure described in 3 9 3 9 Accessing Directories The procedure for accessing a directory depends on the current directory location and the location of the directory to be accessed 1 Directories listed on the File Manager screen of the home directory are accessed by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the directory is listed and using ZOOM IN 2 Directories that are located in a directory branching off of the home directory are accessed by using at each suc cessive directory level until the desired directory is accessed For example to access the directory HOME client reports from the File Manager screen of the home directory on client then ZOOM IN on reports 3 Directories located in other directories that do not branch off of the home directory are accessed by using ZOOM OUT until the parent directory for the desired directory is accessed and then by using at each successive level until the desired directory is accessed Alternatively directories are accessed by using ENTER pathname USE 4 The home directory is accessed from any other directory by using MENU and selecting Show home directory 3 10 Copying Directories Directories are copied from the File Manager screen into the current directory or another directory by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the directory is listed and using PICK COPY The cursor will
42. Ue ow cw FS we we ww ew 107 Appendix TEN PLUS FUNCTIONS x 108 1 CONTROL AND MENU FUNCTIONS 108 2 WINDOW POSITIONING FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES s 4 x 109 3 CURSOR POSITIONING FUNCTIONS 110 4 TAB E rr FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES 5 a v es x os X ddl iii TEXT MANIPULATION FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES a ee oe eee MULTIPLE FILE WINDOW FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES s e Is EXIT SAVE FUNCTIONS AND TNES 2 l6 iv TEN PLUS Tutorial 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Scope of This Tutorial This tutorial is a self paced training guide for beginners who wish to learn how to use the TEN PLUS system to create edit and manage text files It is designed for users having no system management responsibilities Use of this tutorial requires that the TEN PLUS User Interface has been installed and is available for use This tutorial introduces the basic components of the TEN PLUS User Interface and describes how it provides a bridge to the UNIX Operating System It explains procedures for entering exiting and reentering the TEN PLUS system that facilitate moving back and forth between the TEN PLUS system and the UNIX System shell It details only the fundamental UNIX System commands such as those used for logging in and logging out Refer to your user s manual for detailed information about UNIX System commands This tutorial is designed as an introduction t
43. an illegal name or the disk is full Action Change the permission bits so that you can create the file or directory To edit the file or directory specify its legal name If the disk is full contact your system administrator Cannot put a window there Cause You have attempted to create a window that is too small to contain data Action Move the cursor and try again Cannot run program to program Cause You have tried to run a program that cannot execute Action Contact your system administrator Cannot save editor state in file filename Cause The editor attempts to remember what you were doing just before you use so that you can continue the next time you run the editor It does this by sav ing its state in a file The attempt to open this file has failed The next time you start the editor without an argument you will be looking at a default file Action No action required Cannot split in indexed field Cause You have used ENTER INSERT to split a line while in a field with a tree data path that is an indexed field can be used only in fields having text data paths Action To split the line use pick and put operations in con junction with BOX MARK and the horizontal and or vertical cursor positioning functions TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 53 Cannot use TEXTREGION ina ganged field Cause You have used TEXT MARK to specify a region of text in a ganged field can o
44. as a cursor defined argument 88 2 If an invalid argument is given the editor writes an error message into a popup box on the screen The table in Appendix A indicates the type of argument accepted by each function and gives the interpre tation for each You can use any of these functions to edit the text typed into a popup box E BEGIN LINE END LINE To cancel the argument entirely use ENTER or CANCEL LAST ARG displays the argument last typed in the popup box Type additional characters or use any of the functions listed above to modify the argument 28 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 8 2 Cursor Defined Arguments Cursor positioning functions are used as arguments to to define a set of lines or characters or a block on the display to be manipulated Cursor defined arguments are used in conjunction with INSERT DELETE PICK UP PICK COPY MARGIN and 87 2 7 19 7 3 87 7 89 4 89 5 to designate groups of lines or specific portions of lines for editing Cursor defined argu ments can also be initiated by using BOX MARK or TEXT MARK instead of ENTER 8 2 1 Designating Lines To use a cursor defined argument to delete lines position the cursor anywhere on the first line to be deleted then use to begin defining the argument Position the cursor on the last line to be deleted then use to delete the lines from the starting cur sor position to the ending cursor position To create one
45. available as file bak If any of the files are not structured files a warning will be printed and no action will be taken Following are the options to rmhist d Delete bak file after removing history f Aca print warnings about attempts to remove history from file s kn Keep only the last n days of history from the current date SEE ALSO e 1 ghost 1 history 1 newfile 1 readfile 1 versions 1 WARNING If the system date has been improperly set to a future date history time stamp information will be invalid and rmhist will fail Correct the problem by using ghost 1 with the future date as an argument Then use rmhist to remove the history TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 rpl 1 rpl 1 NAME rpl replace all occurrences of a string in a file being edited by INed SYNOPSIS rpl expr substitute DESCRIPTION Rpl reads the standard input and on the standard output writes the file obtained by replacing all occurrences of the character string that is its first argument by the string that is its second argument Rpl is intended primarily for use with the key of the INed editor but it can also be used for general text processing applications The first argument is usually a simple text string However certain special characters may be used to form regular expressions which can match classes of text strings The symbols that have special meanings in forming regular expressions are listed below symbol
46. copy sentences For example to delete a sentence 1 position the cursor on the first character of the sentence to be deleted 2 use to begin defining the region 3 position the cursor directly on the first character not to be deleted for example on the first character of the next sen tence and 4 use DELETE INSERT PICK UP or PICK COPY can also be used with TEXT MARK by substituting INSERT PICK UP or PICK COPY respectively for DELETE When TEXT MARK is used the message x TEXT x xx appears at the bottom of the screen On some displays moving the cursor highlights the selected region The sequence can be ter minated with ENTER or CANCEL 30 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Use PAGE PAGE LINE and to indicate argu ments spanning more than one window The cursor positioning functions can be used to define partial lines and and can be used after to move the cursor to the beginning or end of the current line respectively TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 31 9 TEXT PROCESSING FUNCTIONS Programs that perform text processing operations such as string replacement paragraph fill and justification indenting and multiple spacing can be run from within the editor by using a filter A filter is a program that performs a predefined operation on text The requested operation is performed on the indicated paragraphs or lines and the results are
47. customizing 2 editor profile 2 editor profile creating 2 editor profile MENU Options 3 editor profile top level 2 editor profile using 2 editor search paths 8 editor search paths establishing 9 Editor Search Paths option 8 editorprf 2 environment variable 11 12 SFILE 4 12 file hidden 15 file manager profile 14 file manager profile creating 14 file manager profile top level 14 file previous versions 15 Files the Editor Should Watch option 7 files watch 7 FORM 4 HELP adding menu options 7 HELP menu options 6 HELP Options 6 SHELPER 4 hidden file 15 hidden files specifying 15 history removing 5 index file 15 indexprf 14 indexprf creating 14 indexprf top level 14 menu entries sample 3 menu for PRINT 10 MENU Options editor profile 3 menu options HELP 6 MENU Options Type entries 3 New Task Menu 3 old file 15 pipeline command 4 PRINT 10 PRINT adding menu options 10 print file temporary 10 Print Helper 10 PRINT menu 10 print option details 12 print profile 10 print profile adding menu options 13 print profile commands 11 print profile creating 10 print profile default 12 print profile entries sample 10 print profile modifying 10 print profile sample entries 13 print profile top level 11 17 INDEX printprf 10 prompt multivord 5 prompt user 4 11 PRTCMD 11 12 PRTFILE 11 12 putdir directory 14 redirection of standard input 4 removing hist
48. down one line can also be used in conjunction with a cursor defined argument 88 2 to open either a specific number of lines or a block If lines are indicated motion opens the number of lines defined where motion indicates a cursor positioning func tion If an area is indicated blank spaces are inserted and the remainder of each line on which the blanks are inserted is moved to the right No characters are deleted however this sometimes causes the remainder of the line to move beyond the right hand win dow border 7 3 Moving Lines and Areas Joining Lines PICK UP picks up the current line and adds it to the pick buffer For all variations of PICK UP the cursor always returns to the position it occupied before was used and all subsequent lines in the file move up one line The pick buffer contains lines or areas of text from PICK UP or PICK COPY 87 7 The text in the pick buffer can be inserted anywhere in the text by using PUT COPY or PUT DOWN 7 8 ENTER PICK UP picks up the current line from the current cursor position to the end of the line and replaces it with the text on the next line In effect it joins the text on the current line to the left of the cursor with the next line The effect of can be canceled by issuing immediately thereafter n PICK UP where n is a positive numeric argument removes n lines beginning with the current line The lines are placed in the pick buffer and all subsequent
49. file by using and selecting Show history of current file This causes the History Display form to appear on the display The History Display form shows the name of the user who edited the file the date and time the editing started and the number of lines or records that were inserted deleted or changed 4 2 Accessing the Versions of a File The different versions of a file are accessed from the History Display form by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the version is listed and using ZOOM IN The selected ver sion of the file as it existed after the changes indicated on the form is displayed to return to the History Display form 4 3 Using LOCAL MENU with the History Display is used while viewing a previous version of a file to print the time of the version in a popup box show the next version show the previous version redisplay the history form or save the version 4 4 Saving a Version of a File A version of a file is saved by accessing that version from the His tory Display form and selecting option 5 save current version of file This causes an instruction box with the message Enter file name filename to appear on the display To save the version under a different name enter the name and EXECUTE To save the version under the original name and move the current version to filename bak EXECUTE without entering a new file name ZOOM OUT twice to return to the origi nal file TEN
50. file name status in the File field Use or one of the other cursor positioning functions to move the cursor to the Description field then type Current Sales Status INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description status Current Sales Status_ usr larry INSERT Line Now refer to your keyboard template to locate the key or keys used to ZOOM IN and then ZOOM IN The TEN PLUS system deter mines that a file named status does not exist in your home direc tory and shows you a menu with four options 6 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description Current Sales Status You are attempting to create file usr larry status Move the cursor to the type of file you want and touch EXECUTE Touch CANCEL to do nothing HELP for help Create an ASCII file without history Create a structured file with history Create a directory Re enter the file name usr larry INSERT Line The options shown allow you to create an ASCII file a structured file or a directory or to reenter the file name in case you mistyped it Usually you will create ASCII files which are ordinary text files The examples in this primer use only directories and ASCII files Structured files allow users to keep a record of different ver sions of a document and to recreate any prior version Structured
51. files are particularly useful when you need to look at past versions of a document such as a legal contract or a business plan Many TEN PLUS applications such as the TEN PLUS Mail System use structured files Refer to section 2 of the TEN PLUS Reference Manual in this guide for more information about file types With the cursor on the option Create an ASCII file without history use EXECUTE After a brief pause a blank window appears TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 7 usr larry status INSERT Line You have just created a file with the short name status The line at the top of the screen is a ruler showing the positions of the left and right hand margins 1 and r and of the tab stops t Instructions for changing margins and tab stops appear later on in this primer Type some text into your new file When you complete the last line on the screen the text will scroll forward up bringing in addi tional blank lines at the bottom of the screen You can also scroll forward by using either or to move beyond the area displayed on the screen scrolls text forward by one screen and scrolls text forward by approximately one third of a screen Similarly and scroll text backward down Use ZOOM OUT to move from the status file back to your home directory It does not matter where the cursor is positioned in the file when you ZOOM OUT 8 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 USING HELP AND CANCEL provides deta
52. first line of the file displays the end of the file and positions the cursor on the last line of the file always displays the end of the file and positions the cursor on the last line of the file line number moves the cursor to that line of the file For example 47 displays the portion of the file that contains line 47 and positions the cur sor on that line Displays information relevant to the current situation Moves the cursor to the upper left hand corner of the display Alternates between insert and overwrite modes Brings into view a portion approximately one third of the width of the screen of the file that extends beyond the left hand border TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 29 LINE LINE MARGIN PAGE PAGE HIT Scrolls the text forward up approxi mately one third of the screen at a time ENTER n LINE scrolls the text for ward n lines For example ENTER 3 scrolls the text forward three lines Scrolls the text backward down approxi mately one third of the screen at a time n scrolls the text back ward n lines For example 4 scrolls the text backward four lines Sets the left hand margin at the current cursor position MARGIN sets the right hand margin Scrolls the text forward up a full screen at a time n PAGE scrolls the text forward n full screens For example ENTER 2 PAGE scrolls the text for ward two full screens Scrolls the text ba
53. into a subshell To exit the subshell press the key then press Ctr1 d ghost oldname newname m d y h m s Creates the version of oldname that existed at the time indicated by the last two arguments If the last two arguments are omitted the most recent version is pro duced The output is put into newname If newname is omitted oldname is backed up in a bak file and the results are put into oldname history filename Prints out a detailed description of the history of changes to the structured file filename newfile asciifile structuredfile Converts asciifile from ASCII to structured format and places it into structuredfile If no second argument is given the first argument file is saved into a bak file and converted to structured format readfile filename Writes the structured file filename onto the screen Thus readfile filename gt newfilename can be used to convert the structured file filename into the ASCII file newfilename rmhist file file Takes a list of files and removes the history information from each The original version is saved in a bak file If the original file is not structured a warning is given and the next file is processed versions filename Uses history but only prints out the times when the file was changed The result can be used to create an argument to ghost to recreate a file as it existed at a certain moment in its history TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 45
54. like a stream of characters Structured files store specialized data such as the help menus you will use later 8 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 position When a file is created the cursor is positioned on the first line of the new file Certain file specific information such as the file name appears below the window System instructions and comments appear when ever necessary in popup boxes in the window Use to remove popup boxes provides general editing information and specific information pertaining to a popup box when one is displayed is avail able whenever you are in the TEN PLUS environment Refer to this function occasionally while reviewing this tutorial to become fami liar with its use 2 4 Using the Keyboard Some keyboards differ slightly from regular typewriters Some sym bols may be located in different positions and others may be unique to keyboards On some keyboards the numeric keypad can be used for rapid entry of numbers when NUM LOCK is in effect Follow the steps outlined below to acquaint yourself with the key board The words automatically wrap at the right hand margin indicated at the top of the window it is not necessary to press ENTER at the end of a line The text automatically scrolls up when the bottom of the window is reached 1 Examine your keyboard and note the different symbols 2 Find the key for the numeral 1 Note that it is different from the letter 1 3 BACKSPACE to eras
55. line of the file n moves the cursor to line n 14 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 6 TEN PLUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS This section describes functions that assist in controlling TEN PLUS functions and simplify system operations performed within the TEN PLUS environment It includes procedures for interrupting search or filter operations displaying information about error mes sages functions and operations using menus to simplify system operations and select data specific functions controlling detail while viewing structured files printing documents moving sequentially through the items in a structured file creating and editing alternate files and saving files without exiting the editor 6 1 Canceling Operations BREAK BREAK interrupts a search or filter operation 7 9 9 leaving the window position and the file unchanged works only if the canceled operation has not completed will not undo the operation if the operation completes prior to using BREAK 6 2 Error Message and Other Explanations HELP provides information about error messages functions and operations can be used from anywhere within the TEN PLUS environment If is used and there are no error messages or popup boxes in the window the Help Menu displays The Help Menu is used to provide additional information about editor functions keyboard layouts TEN PLUS operations customiz ing the editing system and customizing MENU If is used whil
56. linefeed Ctr1 j are preserved in files edited by INed Ctrl1 j will cause the loss of the end of line and should be avoided 11 2 TEN PLUS Limitations If there are any TEN PLUS limitations specific to your system an addendum has been provided that describes them 11 3 The Editor Profile It is possible to give the editor instructions on how to act in certain circumstances This information is normally stored in the editor profile Refer to TEN PLUS Profiles for details on how to create and modify the editor profile file FUNCTION Action of Action of Action of ENTER X FUNCTION Action of FUNCTION ENTER FUNCTION X is any argument ENTER motion FUNCTION motion is a combination of cursor positioning functions 1 8 Use the nth special function Data dependent peaks dependent Data dependent t Move the cursor one position in the Enter BOX LINE mode define a ERROR Note 1 Continue defining argument indicated direction region to the next cursor position BACKSPACE Delete the character to the left of No effect Delete the last character of X ERROR Note 2 the cursor i BEGIN LINE Move the cursor to the first non Enter BOX LINE mode define a space character of the current line region to the first nonspace character of the current line eee m ee ee C BOX MARK Enter BOX LINE mode ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR Continue defining argument
57. meaning At the beginning of a regular expression matches the empty string at the beginning of a line Matches any character except a new line character Matches the end of a line n Matches the character whose ASCII code is given by n where 7 is up to three octal digits except for 012 because rpl works on a single line at a time it is impossible to match the new line character A string of characters enclosed in square brackets matches any character in the string but no others If however the first character of the string is the regular expression matches any character except new line and the characters in the string Within brackets the minus means through For example a z is equivalent to abed xyz The can appear as itself only if used as the last or first character For example the character class expression matches the characters and t A regular expression followed by means one or more times For example 0 9 4 is equivalent to 0 9 0 9 A regular expression followed by means zero or more times m m m u Integer values enclosed in indicate the number of times the preceding regular expression is to be applied The minimum number is m and u is a number less than 256 which is the maximum If only m is present i e m m indicates the exact number of times the regular expression is to be applied m is analogous to m infinity
58. move down one line Position the cursor where the copy is to be placed and use PUT DOWN An instruction box with the message File name pathname already exists Press CANCEL to abort file restore or enter a new name appears on the display Type the new directory name at the cursor position and use EXECUTE The directory is copied into the current directory and listed on the File Manager screen at the cursor position You can also copy multiple directories using or ENTER vertical motion with and PUT DOWN TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 9 To copy a directory into another directory access that directory using the procedure described in 3 9 before using PUT DOWN In this case the path name usually will not be duplicated so the instruction box will not display 3 11 Moving Directories Directories are moved by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the directory is listed and using PICK UP The directory is removed from the directory listing and the files listed below it move up one line Move the cursor to the location where the directory is to be moved and use PUT DOWN You can also copy multiple directories using or ENTER vertical motion with and PUT DOWN If the direc tory is to be moved to another directory change to that directory using the procedures described in 3 9 before using PUT DOWN The directory is moved into the current directory and listed on the File Manager screen at
59. on 6 9 Editing and Creating Alternate Files USE filename reads in filename as the current file and saves the previous file as the alternate file If a file with the specified name does not exist a menu displays requesting that the user select the type of file to be created Possible file types are described in 82 2 returns the editor to its previous state a new file is not created and the window and alternate file status are not changed without an argument switches the current and alternate files The cursor position of the alternate file is restored to its previous position and the current file becomes the new alternate file is similar to ENTER filename USE but takes the file name argument from the text in the window start ing at the current cursor position and ending with the first blank The current file is both the current and alternate file if that file name is used as the argument to ENTER filename USE can then be used to switch back and forth between two different positions in the same file without losing the cursor positions This is TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 17 useful when two different sections of the same file are edited or when you wish to move lines from one part of a file to another 6 10 Saving Files Without Exiting the Editor SAVE For ASCII files writes an edited file onto disk For struc tured files writes the current record to disk The current state of the edited file or reco
60. permission on a file allows you to modify that file The defaults allow write permission on files and directories only to the owner TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 69 The combination of execute and read permissions on a directory allows you to to that directory and view the listing of files and directories stored there Execute permission on a directory allows you to access a file in that directory although without read permission you cannot see the listing of the directory on your screen If a file is an executable program execute permission allows you to run that program The defaults allow execute permission on direc tories to all users and execute permission on files to no one Each set of permissions applies to one of three categories of users owner group and others The owner is the person who creates the file or directory A group often consists of people working on the same project or in the same department You are usually assigned to a group when you are added as a user to the system Others refers to everyone on the sys tem who is neither the owner nor in the owner s group 5 11 1 Changing Permissions on Files and Directories You can change the permissions on your files and directories through the LOCAL MENU for the File Manager 1 Use LOCAL MENU INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming
61. places your deleted files and direc tories The default is the putdir directory located in your home directory You can change this default by replacing it with a new directory name For example you might decide to place deleted files and directories in a directory called removed in your home directory In this case you would type the path name HOME removed over the existing path name in this option A directory name must be specified for this option or you will be unable to delete files or directories The Files to be hidden option specifies those files that are to be hidden by the system By default all files beginning with a or ending in bak old or index will be hidden The asterisk you see in the display is used as a wildcard which means that it is equivalent to any character or characters Files ending in bak are created by the system each time you complete an editing session on an ASCII file such as those you have been using The previous version of that file is not deleted but is renamed by truncating the file name to 10 characters if necessary and appending bak Any previous bak file is overwritten A index file is a struc tured file created and used by the File Manager to edit a directory you cannot access a index file directly You can specify which files are to be hidden in your directory listing by modifying the list of file names contained in this option You can however always view a listing of all file
62. processed Lines beginning with gf are grand footer lines and are printed after all files have been processed gh Start of Mail Messages gf End of all messages There are eleven special field names The first seven take no argu ments FNAME is the name of the file being processed NRECS is the number of records in that file RECPRT is the number of records printed for the current file GRECPRT is the number of records printed for all files RNUM is the number of the record being processed DATE is the current date TIME is the current time These take two arguments the fieldname to keep totals on and the for mat to print it in The format is a simplified printf style string m n where m is the minimum width of the field and n is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point TOTAL is the total for a field per record FTOTAL is the total for a field per file GTOTAL is the grand total for a field for all files TEN PLUS User Interface 2 Release 2 2 prtsf 1 Base prtsf 1 For example to use TOTAL fieldname format you would say TOTAL price 5 2 RTOTAL the total of a row per line is a special field that takes more than one fieldname Its use is RTOTAL format fieldname field names In the following example this formatfile would print a header consist ing of the name of the mailbox and the number of messages it con tains followed by the messages each with its record numb
63. re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the mark These are inexpensive condos whose biggest selling point is their cheap price and impressive list of standard features usr larry report INSERT Line 4 to the second tab stop and use MARGIN 5 Continue typing TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 17 I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so goodl This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the mark These are inexpensive condos whose biggest selling point is their cheap price and impressive list of standard features They re really a first home investment not the type a buyer would plan to live in for more than 2 3 years usr larry report INSERT Line 6 Position the cursor in the column to the right of the left hand window border and use MARGIN The le
64. select the Re enter the file name option type the correct file name into the popup box that displays and use EXECUTE The second file will appear on the screen TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 53 4 Use to alternate between the two files The name and line number of the displayed file are printed at the bottom of the screen 4 20 2 Creating Multiple Windows Two or more files or several different sections of the same file may be in constant view by dividing the window into smaller multiple windows To create a window the cursor must be positioned at the division point To create a horizontal window position the cursor on the line where the window is to be divided To create a vertical window position the cursor on the first line of the window at the desired division point The following diagrams show the cursor positions for creating verti cal and horizontal windows These particular cursor positions are only examples you may create windows of any size you choose tmp file2 INSERT Line 54 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 tmp file2 INSERT Line To create a window l Position the cursor at the appropriate location use ENTER then type a file name Use WINDOW If the file is an existing file that file appears in the window If the file is the file you are currently editing that file appears in the window and you may edit or view another section of it If you type the nam
65. so the line containing the cursor is the top line in the window ENTER LINE moves the window so the line containing the cursor is the bottom line in the window ENTER n LINE moves the window n lines forward and ENTER n LINE moves the window 7 lines backward PAGE PAGE These functions move the text one window for ward PAGE or backward PAGE The cursor remains in the same column on the same line relative to the top and bottom borders in the window n PAGE moves the window n pages forward and ENTER n PAGE moves the window n pages backward TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 13 These functions move the window in the indi cated direction displaying text previously to the left LEFT or right RIGHT of the window The cursor remains in the same column unless the column it is in scrolls out side of the window If is used and the cursor column scrolls outside of the window the cursor moves to the right hand margin If is used and the cursor column scrolls outside of the window the cursor moves to the left hand margin n moves the window n columns to the right and ENTER n moves the window n columns to the left This function moves the window to the first page of the file and the cursor to the first line If the cursor is at the first line in the file the window moves to the last page of the file and the cursor moves to the last line moves the cursor to the last
66. standard features will raise your Standard of living more than you ever thought possible for just 1 500 down I ll buy two for my kids right now As you can see so far things are going well I got the hang of the system in just a few short hours It is so easy to use I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past I can already tell that this system will speed things up immensely Preliminary comments from Janet I read it all and it looks ok to me Pat s ideas on the campaign seemed a bit odd to me Are we going to get together in the next few days to discuss all this Preliminary comments from Larry usr larry report INSERT Line 4 10 Deleting and Duplicating Lines Using BOX MARK There are two methods that can be used to delete a paragraph or section from a file The first is to delete each line individually and the second is to delete all lines at one time The first which uses DELETE may be sufficient for short blocks of text but is time consuming if the block is lengthy The second which uses BOX MARK is more efficient for larger blocks of text To use BOX MARK to delete a section of text 1 Position the cursor at the beginning of the section to be deleted and use BOX MARK 2 Move the cursor down through the end of the section to be deleted When deleting a paragraph include the blank line at the end of the paragraph 3 Use DELETE The section i
67. system commands All functions that can be performed from the UNIX System shell can be performed using one of the TEN PLUS User Interface com ponents Since all five components use a system of menus and func tions that allow the user to select a desired operation it is rarely necessary to remember a specific UNIX System command 2 1 1 The INed Editor INed is a screen oriented text editor that allows users to display and edit text files The INed editor is used to modify files by typing over existing text displayed in a two dimensional window on the screen The INed editor is easy to use because it allows users to enter and modify text files directly INed users enter and edit text by typing on the display as they would using a typewriter Placing the cursor at the appropriate position on the display and then typing new characters enters them into the file The display contains a window that can be moved to the left or right to see other parts of the file This window can be divided into several smaller windows for convenient editing or examination of files This feature can be used in conjunction with other functions to pick up text from one file and put it into another file or another portion of the same file The INed command language employs a variety of functions for inserting deleting and moving characters lines blocks of text and running text on the screen INed functions are invoked by a series of keystrokes Additional
68. text image Group r Set Gid Permissions Owner rw Set Uid File Access Times usr larry Time of last file Time of last data Time of last file access modification Status change INSERT Mar 11 1988 10 25 32 Mar 11 1988 10 25 32 Mar 11 1988 10 25 32 Line 1 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 73 5 With the cursor in the field labeled Permissions use to enter overwrite mode Change the permis sions so that users in your group have write permission on the file Do this by typing a w over the first in the Group field Detailed File Status Information Full path name usr larry report Description File Size in Bytes 2488 427 File Size in Blocks 5 File Type Ordinary Number of Links 1 Inode 2053 Directory ID 2 10 Device ID N A Ownership Owner of the file larry Uid 229 Group of the file staff Gid 1 Permissions Owner rw Group rw Other r Set Uid Set Gid Save text image File Time of last file access Mar 11 1988 10 25 32 Access Time of last data modification Mar 11 1988 10 25 32 Times Time of last file status change Mar 11 1988 10 25 32 usr larry OVERWRITE Line 1t 1 6 Use LOCAL MENU 74 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Detailed File Status Information Full path name usr larry report Description File Size in Bytes 2488 427 File Size in Blocks 5 File Type Ordinary Number of Links 1 Inode 2053 Directory ID 2 10 Dev
69. that the gt symbol appears below the window to indicate that there is text to the right of the border and that the text so fast and is not visible in the window 4 Use RIGHT to see the text to the right of the window hang of the system in just a few short hours It s so fast and lieve I used to rely so heavily on personnel and nd ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but tuffy for a progressive young company like of business people in a conference room setting re looking for this client deserves something as ative approach although still using photography I envision a scene with one prop against a white the picture is a salesman standing behind a ppears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more d around in front of the booth waiting for their ting out checks or waving their checkbooks is taking orders and checks as fast as he can usr larry report INSERT Line Note that the symbol now appears below the window to indicate that there is text to the left of the window TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 29 5 Use to move the window back to its original position 6 Reset the default margins to reactivate word wrap 4 3 Correcting Transpositions and Typographical Errors When the editor is in overwrite mode it is possible to correct typo graphical errors by typing the correct characters over the incorrect ones As each character is typed it overwrit
70. the field has multiple lines the first line is used When there are multiple fields later fields are compared only after all earlier fields are deter mined to be equal Lines that otherwise compare equally are ordered with all bytes significant The default ordering is lexicographic by bytes in machine collating sequence The ordering is affected by the following options one or more of which may appear b Ignore leading blanks spaces and tabs in field comparisons d Dictionary order only letters digits and blanks are significant in comparisons f Fold uppercase letters into lowercase letters i Ignore characters outside the ASCII range 040 0176 in non numeric comparisons n An initial numeric string consisting of optional blanks optional minus sign and zero or more digits with optional decimal point is sorted by arithmetic value Option n implies option b r Reverse the sense of comparisons The v option causes sortsf to be verbose about its operations EXAMPLES Sort a mailbox in reverse dictionary order by sender and subject sortsf rd Sender Subject mbx FILES tmp SEE ALSO catsf prtsf DIAGNOSTICS Comments and exits with nonzero status for various trouble conditions WARNINGS The sortsf program preserves history so large files tend to grow quickly when being sorted TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 tconvert 1 Base tconvert 1 NAME tconvert convert etc termcap t
71. the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so good This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the usr larry report INSERT Line 3t 39 v 3 Use RESTORE five times to recover the DELETE d lines then use FORMAT 4 5 2 Using PICK UP Like DELETE PICK UP removes the line containing the cursor and moves the remaining lines up but it places the line in the pick buffer rather than in the wastebasket buffer Recover picked up text with PUT DOWN which removes the text from the pick buffer TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 33 and replaces it in the file Any text that is not
72. times that the file was opened for modification and can be used to reconstruct the file using the ghost 1 program SEE ALSO e 1 ghost 1 history 1 newfile 1 readfile 1 rmhist 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 ined 4 NAME Base ined 4 ined files used by the INed system DESCRIPTION The directory usr lib INed contains a number of files and subdirec tories used internally by the INed editing system forms is a directory containing forms used by the INed system Files ending in x or named x use the form x ofm The forms are binary files used directly by INed in generating displays helpers is a directory containing programs invoked by INed to help work on certain kinds of data Files ending in x or named x use the helper named x help Helpers typically supply the functions listed by the INed LOCAL MENU help is a directory containing files to display when the INed function is used hmgs is a directory containing all the messages displayed by the INed IBELP function when an error message or menu is displayed FILES usr lib INed SEE ALSO e 1 TEN PLUS Reference Manual TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 e terms 4 Base terms 4 NAME def trm terms bin INed terminal description file DESCRIPTION The structured file def trm contains an entry for each terminal sup ported by INed Each terminal description contains two sections a mapping of editor functions to the keyb
73. to go for the first time buyer convince him that this is the opportunity he s been waiting for to make the jump from renter to homeowner He couldn t care less about how long the home will last He wants a lifestyle and a low down payment I say we go with a headline that expands this message such as Our long list of standard features will raise your standard of living more than you ever thought possible for just 1 500 down I ll buy two for my kids right now Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I 11 begin working up some new copy for the campaign usr larry report INSERT Line TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 23 3 6 Changing Tab Stops The editor has default tab stops indicated by the markers above the window The default tabs stops are located eight columns apart During an editing session individual tabs can be cleared or set but the default tab stops are reinstated whenever you exit the TEN PLUS environment and then reaccess a file To clear a tab stop l to the appropriate tab stop 2 Use ENTER SET TAB To set individual tabs l Position the cursor at the appropriate column within the win dow 2 Use SET TAB Note that SET TAB will only work when the cursor is positioned within the window Practice clearing and setting tab stops l to the first tab stop 2 Use ENTER SET TAB 3 Repe
74. to the desired function and touch EXECUTE Touch CANCEL to do nothing HELP for help MENU LOCAL MENU FORMAT INSERT PICK UP PUT DOWN PICK COPY PUT COPY ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT FUNCTIONS options are selected in the same way options are selcted To remove the menu use CANCEL any menu TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 27 8 ARGUMENTS TO FUNCTIONS Functions when used alone pass simple requests to the editor Modifying a function with an argument permits a greater range of function capabilities The process of entering an argument can be canceled by using or another ENTER 8 1 Typed Arguments Most functions accept arguments The argument can be a number a string or a cursor positioning sequence If the argument contains the name of an exported shell variable the variable is expanded before the operation is performed To use a function with an argument use ENTER the argument and then the function After is issued a popup box into which the argument should be typed displays on the screen If the popup box is too small it automatically scrolls to fit the entire argu ment Issuing the appropriate function initiates the operation Some functions like PAGE and LEFT accept only numeric arguments Others like SEARCH and WINDOW accept any string that does not contain cursor positioning functions If a cursor positioning function is issued as an argument to ENTER the argument is interpreted
75. two procedures an alternate file approach and a multiple window approach used to access several files during the same editor session These procedures facilitate copying or moving text between different files or between different portions of the same file 5 USING THE FILE MANAGER This section describes how to use the File Manager to manipulate files and directories It explains procedures for copying deleting combining moving and renaming files and directories It also describes how to change permissions on files and directories either to limit or give access to others for reading and editing An explanation of how directories are structured is provided along with a description of how to create and remove directories 6 STRUCTURED FILES AND THE HISTORY DISPLAY This section describes TEN PLUS structured files and explains briefly why many of the TEN PLUS functions and features can be used only on structured files It TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 3 explains how to convert files from structured to ASCII and ASCII to structured This section also introduces the History Display utility It explains how to use the History Display to recall pre vious versions of structured files 7 THE C PROGRAMMING HELPER This section describes how the TEN PLUS C Program ming Helper can be used It is intended for C program mers who want to develop compile and test programs without leaving the TEN PLUS environment The C Programming H
76. usually indicated on the screen Some filters are invoked using the sequence argument DO This sequence passes the requested lines to the specified program and replaces those lines with the result of the program s execution The old lines are saved and can be accessed with RESTORE Other filters are invoked by simply using a function such as or CENTER 9 3 9 5 This section describes the text processing filters that can be used with the editor Possible filter arguments and their effects are explained in detail in 9 1 The most useful text processing filters are described in 9 2 Additional text processing capabilities are described in 9 3 through 9 6 Canceling a filter operation is described in 9 7 Examples of how to use text processing pro grams or filters with are provided in 9 8 Interactive programs those that request input from the user should not be run using ENTER argument DO Programs started this way can be stopped with BREAK 9 1 Using Arguments ENTER argument DO argument is unique because it can take more than one argument If more than one argument is specified each argument is separated by one or more spaces Any environment variables in the argument string are expanded before use see sh 1 for an explana tion of environment variables Possible arguments for ENTER argument are l An optional first argument specifying the number of lines an integer followed by the letter
77. white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so good This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the usr larry report INSERT Line 3 v 3 Use PAGE position the cursor on line 34 and use PUT DOWN The lines in the pick buffer are restored and moved to the cursor position 4 9 Adding Lines Using BOX MARK Usually is used for typing words within lines and is used to add one line at a time For major additions either add text while insert mode is in effect or a few lines before beginning to type INSERT ing a large area helps prevent typing over the material that follows the insertion If there are extra blank lines remaining when the insertion has been typed them To a large area quickly cursor define the area by using I Use or to scroll forward if the defined area extends beyond the display Cursor defining to create blank lines requires three steps 1 Position the cursor at the beginning of the area to be opened and use BOX MARK 2 Use
78. working up some new copy for the campaign usr larry report INSERT Line 4 16 Opening Moving Deleting and Duplicating Columns BOX MARK can be used to open move delete and duplicate columns To mark a column using BOX MARK l Position the cursor at the top left hand corner of the column then use BOX MARK 2 Use to move the cursor to the last line in the column 3 Use to move the cursor across the width of the column To open the column use INSERT To move the column use PICK UP position the cursor at the location where the column is to be moved and use PUT DOWN To copy the column use PICK COPY position the cursor at the location where the copy is to be placed and use PUT DOWN Practice using BOX MARK to copy move and delete columns 1 Use LINE 2 Position the cursor on line 41 and complete the list adding titles and extensions 48 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 next few days to discuss all this Pat s ideas on the campaign seemed a bit odd to me We should meet with the following people before the end of the week Adams ext Director Larson ext Graphic Artist Pantages ext Consultant Sternig ext Marketing Manager Winkler ext Consultant Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it Seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I ll begin working up some new copy for the campaign usr larry repor
79. your files are structured or ASCII and how to keep track of lines with com piler errors by always using option 1 before using option 6 96 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 8 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS 8 1 More About HELP and the Help Menu HELP provides additional information about TEN PLUS functions and facilities It is available at any time There are two distinct situations in which HELP is useful 1 When additional information about a currently displayed popup box is required Further information about popup boxes is available by using at any time while the popup box is displayed 2 When additional information about any of the topics in the Help Menu is required To use the Help Menu 1 Use HELP The Help Menu will display INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar Help Menu Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Alphabetic List of Editor Commands How do I How to Customize the Editing System Suggestions for Your MENU Suggestions for Your Print Menu Keyboard Layouts usr larry INSERT Line 2 Select the desired topic The help information for the topic selected displays on the screen For example if the A1pha betic List of Editor Commands is selected a display containing an alphabetic list of e
80. 1 If for any reason fails to bring the system out of the TEN PLUS environ ment use QUIT terminates the editing session unconditionally attempts to save all files and produces the core file The core file can be used by a system programmer to determine the reason for the malfunction 6 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 3 THE FILE MANAGER This section explains how to use the File Manager to create access and manipulate files and directories 3 1 Creating Files Files are created from the File Manager screen by typing a name and optional description then using ZOOM IN A menu appears on the display requesting that the user select the type of file or directory desired or re enter the file name If a file type is selected an empty window appears on the display If a directory is selected an empty File Manager display appears All text is typed within the resulting window or File Manager display 3 2 Exiting Files Files are exited by using ZOOM OUT After a few seconds the File Manager screen appears on the display 3 3 Accessing Existing Files Existing files are accessed from the File Manager screen by posi tioning the cursor on the line on which the file is listed and using ZOOM IN The text from the file appears on the display Existing files may also be accessed by using ENTER filename USE 3 4 Copying Files Files are copied from the File Manager screen into the current directory or another
81. 1 or paragraphs a positive integer to be processed If this argument is omitted the default is one paragraph The first line processed is always the current cursor line If lines beyond the end of the file are requested only lines up to the end of the file are used Thus a large argument for example 9999 usually indicates the rest of the file beginning with the current line 32 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 2 The name of the program filter to be executed This argu ment is required 3 Arguments to the filter These arguments vary according to the filter used An argument containing one or more spaces must be enclosed in paired single or double quotes or Once an argument has been specified DO can be used without ENTER or an argument to run the previous filter operation again 9 2 Replacing Strings rpl The rp1 program see rp 1 for details requires two arguments It replaces all occurrences of the first argument string with the second argument string If no argument precedes rp1 the replace ment starts at the cursor line and continues through to the end of the paragraph Paired single or double quotes are required for arguments containing spaces The rpl program recognizes regular expressions in its first argu ment see ed 1 for a full explanation of regular expressions To delete a string using rpl replace it with the null string To delete all occurrences of the words Computers
82. 2 77 Execute UNIX shell commands Touch CNTL D to continue editing eshell gt date Fri Mar 11 14 41 07 PST 1988 eshell gt 3 Use d then press the key to return to the File Manager display 5 12 2 Executing a Command in a Popup Box The second method of communicating with the system is to execute a command in a popup box 1 Use MENU Select the option Run a shell command in a box a popup box will appear INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description 1988 cal Calendar nens command quiksell QuikSell Project Directory report First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line 2 Type date then use EXECUTE 78 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar sages ze Mar 11 14 45 34 PST 1988 ne Book 8 quiksell QuikSell Project Directory report First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line The output for the command is displayed in the popup box If there is no specific output for the command for example if the cp 1 command is used to copy a file a popup box with the message No output from Run a shell command in a box appears 3 Use CANCEL to remove the popup box Note however that interactive commands commands requiring additional input from the user cannot be
83. 240 Keyboards Figure 7 shows the VT220 and VT240 keyboard layout and func tion locations for the TEN PLUS system Seas B Mae ee Ba ii 4 MH PTE 7 l n DED ooo sum peo V ap BN A 950 em Iri o To invoke a function indicated by 7 hold down the CTRL key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by K hold down the SHIFT key and touch the designated key at the same time Figure 7 VT220 and VT240 Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System zz aseajay uoneuuoju pseoqhay SNTd NIL 6 40 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 8 2 TEN PLUS Functions on VT220 and VT240 Keyboards Functions are accessed in one of three ways on VT240 and VT240 terminals 1 Touch the defined key For example FORMAT is invoked by touching PF3 above the numeric keypad 2 Hold down the Ctr1 key then touch the designated key For example CENTER is invoked by holding down Ctrl then touching the c key 3 Hold down the Shift key then touch the designated key For example is invoked by holding down Shift then touching the F 10 key To log out from the system level hold down the Ctrl key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes E 1 on the numeric keypad 2 on the numeric keypad 3 on the numeric keypad 4 on the numeric keypad 5 on the numeric keypad 6 on the numeric keypad 7 on the numeric keypad 8 on the numeric keypad to the left
84. 34 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Any program suitable for use as a filter can be used with DO including user written programs For example to pick five lines from the current file and place them in file use 51 tee fiel DO The tee filter writes the five lines into file without changing the lines in the current file Use 0 cat file2 to write file2 into the current file at the current cursor line Use sort to sort the lines up to the next blank line in alphabetical order Use 0 date to insert the current date and time at the current line TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 35 10 RECOVERY This section describes the TEN PLUS procedures that prevent accidental destruction of information due to system failures or inad vertent user actions 10 1 Old Versions of ASCII Files A modified ASCII file is saved by exiting the editor or using 86 10 The previous version is not deleted but is renamed by truncating the file name if necessary and appending bak The previous bak file is overwritten 10 2 Old Versions of Structured Files Previous versions of structured files are automatically saved within the file itself and can be recalled through the History Display 84 Specific versions can be saved either by exiting TEN PLUS or using SAVE It is recommended that history be removed periodically using either rmhist 1 or the Housekeep option on the New Task Menu After the history is removed versions prior
85. 8 Z7 se j y jenueyy eoueJejeu SNTId NIL FUNCTION Action of Action of FUNCTION ENTER FUNCTION FORMAT Format the current paragraph with ERROR the margins set on the screen The old version of the text is available with RESTORE FUNCTIONS TIONS menu Move window so line 1 of file is top line If already at line 1 move to the last line in the file Explain the current situation hand corner of the screen INSERT Insert a blank line at CCL INSERT MODE strike mode LAST ARG Display last ENTER argument width or to file boundary which ever is less Display the currently active FUNC Move the cursor to the upper left Display the functions active while using ENTER Move window so last line of file is in the middle of the window Explain the ENTER function Enter BOX LINE mode and draw box from original cursor position to HOME position E J Action of ENTER X FUNCTION Action of X is any argument ENTER motion FUNCTION motion is a combination of cursor positioning functions ERROR Display the functions active while using Display the functions active ENTER X FUNCTION while using ENTER motion FUNCTION X is positive Move window so line X of ERROR file is in the middle of the window Describe TEXT mode Explain the ENTER function ERROR Enter BOX LINE mode and draw box from original cursor position to HO
86. AT original AT and ASCII keyboards The wyse en variable differs from the original variable in that it uses ESCAPE instead of z Keyboard layouts are listed in the keys map file in an easy to understand format To access that file simply use HELP and choose keyboard layouts An ansi terminal description is provided for ANSI terminal emu lators This is specifically designed for users of MultiView Desk Top It should work with any terminal that has a fully functional ANSI compatible mode and a PC style keyboard 8 TRANSLATABLE HELP MESSAGE FILES The TEN PLUS product can be translated into another language without the source code To do this two things need to be translated e The TEN PLUS forms e The TEN PLUS help message files Forms that have sources in usr lib INed srcforms can be copied edited translated and compiled with the forms compiler fc The resulting files all having a name ending in ofm can then be installed in usr lib INed LANG forms TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Release 2 2 5 7 LANG is a Shell variable that is recognized by the TEN PLUS edi tor It should be set to the language desired In a similar way the TEN PLUS help messages can be translated All help message files are found in usr lib INed hngs Release 2 2 5 of the TEN PLUS User Interface now contains the necessary forms to do this as well as a help message helper The use of this helper is self explanatory TEN PLU
87. CE where string is any sequence of printing characters places string in the replace buffer and compares the string at the cursor position to the search string If they are identi cal the string at the cursor position is replaced by string If the string at the cursor position does not match the search string no action is taken deletes the string at the cursor position if it matches the current search string This puts a null string in the replace buffer Once a string has been entered in the replace buffer is used with and to replace selected instances of the search string This is accomplished by first using or until a string to be replaced is located and then using REPLACE Refer to 9 2 for additional information about replacing search strings 7 12 Moving to a Specified Line GO TO ENTER n GO TO where n is a positive numeric argument scrolls the window so that it displays line number 7 several lines down from the top of the window If line n is already positioned in the current window the cursor is positioned on the designated line and the win dow position remains unchanged fff TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 23 without an argument moves the window to the beginning of the file It is equivalent to 1 GO TO If the cursor is positioned at the beginning of the file has the same effect as GO TO which scrolls the window to the end of the file and displays the last line several lines down from the top
88. COPY and PUT DOWN 3 6 Renaming Files Files are renamed from the File Manager screen by positioning the cursor at the appropriate character in the file name and using any of the editing functions for modifying text For example change into overwrite mode by using INSERT MODE type over the old file name and delete any extra characters by using DELETE CHARACTER 3 7 Deleting Files Files are deleted from the File Manager screen by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the file is listed and using DELETE You can also delete multiple files using Or ENTER vertical motion The file or files is removed from the directory and stored in HOME putdir To restore a file from HOME putdir use PICK COPY access the desired directory then use PUT DOWN 3 8 Creating Directories Directories are created from the File Manager screen by typing a name and optional description and using ZOOM IN A menu appears on the display requesting that the user select the type of file or directory desired Position the cursor on the line on which Create a directory is listed and use EXECUTE A blank File Manager screen for the new directory appears on the display A subdirectory is created from the File Manager screen of the directory in which the new subdirectory is to be located The 8 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 appropriate directory must be accessed before creating the new sub directory
89. ERACTIVE Systems Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark of AT amp T AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 is a trademark of AT amp T DEC VT100 VT220 and VT240 are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation Esprit 6310 is a registered trademark of Esprit Systems Inc HP LaserJet II is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company AT and IBM are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation CoEdit and LPI are trademarks of Language Processors Inc Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation WYSE 60 is a registered trademark of Wyse Technology Programs described in this manual are copyrighted and their copyright notices may be found in heralds by using the UNIX System what program and by reading files whose names start with coprisc TEN PLUS User Interface Guide CONTENTS Introduction to the TEN PLUS User Interface TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes TEN PLUS Primer TEN PLUS Tutorial TEN PLUS Reference Manual TEN PLUS Keyboard Information TEN PLUS Profiles TEN PLUS User Interface Manual Entries TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Instructions Introduction to the TEN PLUS User Interface Welcome to the TEN PLUS User Interface Guide This guide contains the documentation you need to install use and customize the TEN PLUS User Interface Before you begin to use the TEN PLUS system be sure to read the next few pages of this docu ment They will tell you wh
90. EXECUTE To do nothing touch CANCEL For help touch HELP 1 Display visible files 2 Display all files Return to normal directory display 4 Show details about files 5 Show more details about this file Show more details about this file usr larry practice INSERT Line This local menu is seldom used in simple applications It is explained in detail in section 5 of the TEN PLUS Tutorial in this fs guide LS 22 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 MORE ABOUT EDITING In addition to the basic TEN PLUS functions several other editing functions are also quite useful They are used to change margins and tab stops to provide alternate methods for modifying or editing existing text to find a specific word or phrase in a file and to move text between files The sections below explain how to use these functions as well as how to print your documents Changing Margins and Tabs Up to now you have used the default margins and tabs that are set automatically You can change these margins and tabs at any time To change the left margin position the cursor where you wish the new left margin to be and use MARGIN The 1 on the ruler on the top line moves to the new left margin To type an indented para graph for example move the left margin in type the paragraph and then move the left margin back to its original position To change the right margin position the cursor where you wish the right margin to be and use ENTE
91. For print profile files the name must be either printprf orendin printprf TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 93 7 TEN PLUS C PROGRAMMING HELPER The C Programming Helper is designed to simplify compiling and debugging C source code The INed editor automatically calls the C Programming Helper whenever you edit a file of C code The editor considers any file named with the extension c to be a C program The C Programming Helper keeps track of compiler errors and their line numbers allowing you to debug code without having to exit the editor The helper reduces the time it takes to debug a C program since it records compiler output and uses the output to search for errors The C Programming Helper uses LOCAL MENU options to position the cursor on each of the compiler errors and displays the compiler diagnostics in a popup box Since the helper keeps track of the locations of subsequent errors even when their line numbers change you can insert and delete lines as necessary This allows you to fix errors in order from the beginning of the code to the end The helper also provides an option used to check for matching delimiters When errors are corrected you can use the helper from the editor to run make 1 This section assumes that you are familiar with the C programming language and the UNIX make facility In addition you should understand the procedures for entering and exiting the TEN PLUS environment 7 1 Using The C P
92. I envision a scene with o background A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so goodl This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the usr larry report INSERT Line 12 v gt Note that the end of the third line in the paragraph is outside the right hand window border 6 Use FORMAT to move the text inside the window Position the cursor at the P in Prominent on line 11 and i use TEXT MARK 8 Press the ENTER key then use to move the cursor to the I at the beginning of the next sentence 9 Use PICK UP The marked text is deleted TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 43 Preliminary report by Pat I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography r
93. IN ZOOM OUT reverses the process 6 6 Printing a Document PRINT PRINT displays a menu containing options for printing a file The standard Print Menu includes options for printing on a default 16 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 printer printing with options overwriting the output to a file and appending the output to a file Additional options can be included by modifying HOME profiles printprf the print profile file The procedure for modifying the print profile file is described in detail in TEN PLUS Profiles 6 7 Selecting Data Specific Functions LOCAL MENU While editing certain types of structured data a menu of additional capabilities specific to the particular data is provided displays this menu can be used in exactly the same way as the Help Menu the New Task Menu and the Print Menu 6 2 6 3 6 6 6 8 Looking at Other Items NEXT and PREVIOUS Structured files often contain items that can be viewed sequentially by using ZOOM IN viewing the item then using ZOOM OUT It is possible to access the next item in the sequence without using by using NEXT It is also possible to access the pre vious item in the sequence without using by using PREVIOUS Both and accept numeric argu ments indicating which item in the sequence to view counting from 0 An example of a file containing items that can be viewed sequentially is the editor profile which contains MENU Options HELP Options and so
94. INSERT MODE Alternates between insert mode and overwrite mode INSERT Creates a blank line PICK UP Picks up a full line from the text and adds it to the pick buffer PUT DOWN Returns last picked line to the file DELETE Deletes a full line and adds it to the wastebasket buffer RESTORE Returns last DELETE d line to the file PICK COPY Copies a full line and adds it to the pick buffer PUT COPY Copies the last picked line to the file The purpose of each of these functions when used alone or in con junction with ENTER is explained more fully later in this section To revise a file 1 Access the file requiring revision 2 Position the cursor at the location of the desired revision using the cursor and window positioning functions 3 Make the revision Before continuing locate the keys used for DELETE CHARACTER INSERT MODE INSERT PICK UP PUT DOWN DELETE RESTORE PICK COPY and PUT COPY Note that some of these functions can also be invoked using FUNCTIONS which displays a menu showing which of the ten basic TEN PLUS func tions are active 26 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 4 1 Deleting Characters or Words Within a Line deletes individual characters or when used repetitively strings of characters within a line As the characters are deleted the rest of the line to the right of the deletion point EN moves toward the cursor Practice using DELETE CHARACTER l Acce
95. ME position Move the right part of CCL starting at the cursor position to a new next line Alternate between insert and over Move window left one third of its Alternate between insert and overstrike mode Insert blank lines or block in area defined by cursor X is positive Insert X blank lines above CCL Alternate between insert and overstrike ERROR mode Display last ENTER argument Move window so that the column the cursor is in is the rightmost column Display last ENTER argument Allow cursor defined region to span vertical screen boundary X is positive Move window left X columns or to file boundary whichever is less 22 eseejay jenueyy eoueJejeu SNTId NIL 6 FUNCTION LINE LINE LINE FEED LOCAL MENU MARGIN WINDOW PAGE PAGE PICK COPY PICK UP Action of FUNCTION Action of ENTER FUNCTION Action of ENTER X FUNCTION X is any argument Move window forward or back ward part of a page Put cursor in the first column of the next line of a ganged field if not on the last line or if the field is scrollable Otherwise ERROR Display the local data specific task menu Set left margin at current cursor column Display the New Task Menu Display the next item in a list The next window becomes the current window Move window forward or back ward one page Add CCL to buffer move
96. NTER 2 Use to move the cursor down to the last line to be centered then use CENTER Note that the lines defined by the cursor are centered Practice this procedure at the end of the report file 1 Use ENTER GO TO to go to the end of the file 2 Type the new text exactly as shown below pressing the ENTER key at the end of each line 22 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 first home investment not the type a buyer would plan to live in for more than 2 3 years We ve got to go for the first time buyer convince him that this is the opportunity he s been waiting for to make the jump from renter to homeowner He couldn t care less about how long the home will last He wants a lifestyle and a low down payment I say we go with a headline that expands this message such as Our long list of standard features will raise your Standard of living more than you ever thought possible for just 1 500 down I ll buy two for my kids right now Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I ll begin working up some new copy for the campaign usr larry report INSERT Line 3 With the cursor on the line containing the word Preliminary use ENTER 4 Move the cursor down to the last line of new text then use first home investment not the type a buyer would plan to live in for more than 2 3 years We ve got
97. PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 11 5 CURSOR AND WINDOW POSITIONING FUNCTIONS 5 1 Cursor Positioning Functions There are eleven cursor positioning functions used with the INed editor D 1 These functions move the cursor one space at a time in the indicated direction When any of these functions are used and the cursor reaches the screen boundary the cursor wraps around to the opposite border If the cursor is posi tioned on top of a border character any typing causes the terminal to beep This function moves the cursor to the upper left hand corner of the window If multiple windows are displayed it moves the cursor to the upper left hand corner of the window in which the cursor is currently positioned LINE FEED This function positions the cursor at the beginning of the next line of a form These functions move the cursor to the next tab stop to the right TAB or left TAB of the current cursor position When the cursor is to the right of the rightmost tab stop in the field moves the cursor to the left to the first column of the window When the cursor is in the leftmost column of the window TAB moves the cursor to the last column of the window If the next tab stop is beyond the window boundary the window scrolls appropriately to the left or right If a field contains no tab stops moves the cursor to the next field or window and moves the cursor to the previous field or window Default tab stops are locat
98. Position the cursor on the line describing the file report then use INSERT Type a directory name and some descrip tive information 62 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies quiksell QuikSell Project Directory report First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line 2 ZOOM IN on the line describing the new directory a menu will appear INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies You are attempting to create file usr larry quiksell Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Create an ASCII file without history Create a structured file with history Create a directory Re enter the file name usr larry INSERT Line 3 Position the cursor on Create a directory and EXECUTE A blank File Manager display for the quik sell directory will appear on the screen 4 ZOOM OUT to your home directory 5 6 Moving Files Between Directories You can move a file from one directory to another with PICK UP and PUT DOWN Move the report fi
99. Profile 5 12 5 Housekeep li 5 12 6 Displaying the d of the Current File 4 CM aed 79 5 13 The File Manager Profile E te fer 4 80 6 THE HISTORY DISPLAY amp w w a s 82 6 1 Types of INed Files x w w hy s a 82 6 2 Creating a Structured File 4 w x a 82 6 2 1 Creating Versions of a File 84 6 3 Accessing the History of a File NS ws s a 85 6 3 1 The History Display Local Menu 4 2 Es 87 6 4 Removing History kk WS e 89 6 5 Structured Nontext Files T WM ER uw s 90 7 TEN PLUS C PROGRAMMING HELPER 93 7 1 Using The C Programming Helper amp e 93 8 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS BER 96 8 1 More About HELP and the Help Menu s ow 8 8 96 8 2 Communicating With the System While in the TEN PLUS Environment s o me wA 97 8 20 1 Running System Commands oe w w 97 8 3 Exiting the TEN PLUS Environment 98 8 4 Sorting Columns e amp amp 99 8 5 Performing Global Search and Replace E ow amp Rs 100 8 6 Using the Spell Program Worm a AO 0I 8 7 Printing a Document 4 s w w 103 8 8 Splitting a File amp w ewe a x 104 8 9 Searching for a Subject Within 2 a Directory UE IN tet a ra uw LOD 8 10 Changing Your Biswond 44 i ie e mom Bly TOD 8 11 Recovering From System Crashes s 106 8 12 Removing Line Noise Characters and Broadcast Messages So e Ec M aes MLL 8 13 Using Wildcards
100. R then MARGIN The r on the ruler on the top line moves to the new right margin You may have occasion to type a line or lines of text that extend beyond the right hand border of the screen To do this you will need to change the right hand margin to a column greater than 77 the default column position for the right margin You can use to bring into view a portion of the file approximately one third of the width of the screen that extends beyond the right hand border Using again will bring another such portion into view Bring as much of the file into view as necessary to reset the right hand margin The maximum setting of the right hand margin is column 200 Similarly you can use to bring into view a portion of the file if any that extends beyond the left hand border You can use BEGIN LINE to move the cursor to the leftmost char acter of the current line and END LINE to move the cursor one position to the right of the rightmost character of the current line To set a new tab stop position the cursor at the desired column and use SET TAB To remove a tab stop use to position the cur sor on that stop then use followed by SET TAB TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 23 Alternating Between Insert and Overwrite Modes Until now you typed text while in insert mode When insert mode is in effect new text is inserted at the cursor position and existing text is moved to the right or word wrapped to the next line T
101. Release 2 2 application guide for more information about specific local menus Here is a sample local menu for an optional TEN PLUS application the TEN PLUS Mail System Subject Forwarded First thoughts on the QuikSell account To larry Ce brian Bcc Date 18 Apr 1984 0957 PDT From Janet Brown I have extracted the juiciest parts here let me know what you think Electronic Mail they want to accomplish with Move the cursor to an item and touch EXECUTE soon with a couple of Touch CANCEL to do nothing HELP for help t down here my best notes of my own on things we 1 Mail this message ls Also I have included 2 Reply to this message orrespondence from the 3 Forward this message a better idea of what has 4 Delete this message u have looked at all of this 5 Restore deleted message questions you may have about 6 File this message in another mailbox roach that will have a very 7 Show in box and add new mail if our proposals are very Size 150 Lines Sent by janet at RALEIGH Status usr larry mhs 1 INSERT Line 6 150 If you use LOCAL MENU when looking at a directory this menu will appear TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 21 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description priorities Priorities for the Account Group Meeting KOC N copiers Copier evaluations memo Letter to Ellen about Lisa Move the cursor to desired action and touch
102. S Primer CONTENTS INTRODUCTION What Will I Learn from This Pina GETTING STARTED Your Home Directory Using ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT Using the Cursor Positioning Functions CREATING DOCUMENTS USING HELP AND CANCEL CREATING DIRECTORIES EDITING FILES AND DIRECTORIES Using PICK UP and PUT DOWN Using PICK COPY and PUT COPY Using FORMAT and INSERT USING MENUS Using MENU Using LOCAL MENU MORE ABOUT EDITING Changing Margins and Tabs Alternating Between Insert and Overwrite Modes Using SEARCH SEARCH and BREAK Using USE 2 d in o y Printing Documents FOR MORE INFORMATION SUMMARY OF TEN PLUS FUNCTIONS The Ten Basic Functions of the TEN PLUS System Some Additional TEN PLUS Functions GLOSSARY o tn FANN em lan TEN PLUS Primer INTRODUCTION What Will Learn From This Primer This primer will introduce you to the ten basic functions of the TEN PLUS environment and will show you how to e Create and store documents such as memoranda letters reports and tables e Retrieve documents e Revise documents e Set up new filing systems e Perform a number of complex tasks such as moving information between documents e Print documents 2 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 GETTING STARTED To use the TEN PLUS system you must turn on your computer or terminal and log in At the login prompt you will type in a user identification that has been assigned to you followed by ENTER Af
103. T DOWN The quiksell directory is restored Remove the number prefix from the directory name if you wish and replace the descriptive text Note that your home directory listing still shows the names of your hidden files You can remove hidden file names from the listing by using LOCAL MENU and selecting 1 Display visible files Since all files and directories deleted from the File Manager display are placed in your putdir directory it is a good practice to periodically clean up that directory with or Housekeep This will free disk space for your current files Files and directories removed from putdir with or Housekeep are permanently removed from the system On some systems the system administrator may have putdir removed periodically 5 11 File and Directory Permissions Each TEN PLUS file or directory has certain default permissions or protections that specify who will have access to it The owner can change the permissions on a file or directory at any time There are three different types of permissions read write and execute The combination of read and execute permissions on a directory allows you to and view the listing of files and directories stored there Read permission on a file allows you to view and copy the contents of that file The defaults allow read permission on files and directories to all users Write permission on a directory allows you to create and delete files in that directory Write
104. TEN PLUS User Interface Guide INTERACT A Kodak Company lt mi First printing March 1990 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means without written permission of INTERACTIVE Systems Corporation 2401 Colorado Avenue Santa Monica California 90404 Copyright INTERACTIVE Systems Corporation 1985 1990 RESTRICTED RIGHTS For non U S Government use These programs are supplied under a license They may be used disclosed and or copied only as permitted under such license agreement Any copy must contain the above copyright notice and this restricted rights notice Use copying and or disclosure of the programs is strictly prohibited unless otherwise provided in the license agreement For U S Government use Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR Section 52 227 14 Alternate III or subparagraph c 1 ii of the clause at DFAR 252 227 7013 Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software All rights reserved Printed in the U S A The rermcap and curses code and documentation were developed at the Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences Department at the Berkeley Campus of the University of California under the auspices of the Regents of the University of California The following trademarks shown as registered are registered in the United States and other countries INed and TEN PLUS are registered trademarks of INT
105. TEN PLUS environment includes two functions and LOCAL MENU that simplify the way you perform more complex tasks Using MENU offers a menu called New Task Menu that provides a number of general purpose options Your New Task Menu displays the same options regardless of which file or directory you are looking at Here is a typical example of a New Task Menu INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description priorities Priorities for the Account Group Meeting copier Copier evaluations memo Letter to Ellen about Lisa New Task Menu Move the cursor to an item and touch EXECUTE Touch CANCEL to do nothing HELP for help Show home directory Display the current date and time Read or send mail Show your profiles directory Edit your editor profile Housekeep Display history of current file l usr larry practice INSERT Line The options on your New Task Menu may differ somewhat from those displayed above You can easily add or remove options from your New Task Menu Refer to section 2 of TEN PLUS Profiles in this guide for additional information about changing your New Task Menu The New Task Menu displayed above contains these options TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 19 Show home directory Returns you to your home directory regardless of where you are in the directory structure Display the current date and time Displays the current date and time in a po
106. THE TEN PLUS USER INTERFACE 1 To begin the installation use the System Administration com mand sysadm or log in as sysadm to access the Main menu Your screen will look similar to this TX SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION diskmgmt disk management menu filemgmt file management menu machinemgmt machine management menu packagemgmt package management menu softwaremgmt software management menu syssetup system setup menu ttymgmt tty management menu usermgmt user management menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enter a number a name the initial part of a name or or number for HELP q to QUIT 2 Type 5 to access the Software Management Menu Your screen will then look similar to this SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT installpkg install new software package onto built in disk listpkg list packages already installed removepkg remove previously installed package from built in disk runpkg run Software package without installing it Enter a number a name the initial part of a name or or number for HELP to GO BACK q to QUIT 3 Select option 1 installpkg The system prompts you to insert the first diskette into the diskette drive The screen will look similar to this Insert the removable medium for the package you want to install into the diskette drive Press lt RETURN gt when ready Type q to quit TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Release 2 2 3 4 Insert the TEN PLUS User Interface diskette into the diskette
107. TION Prtty prints the named files to the printer port of your terminal If the flag is specified it will prompt you to start the printing and will reprompt after number lines The default number of lines is 60 If no files are specified it reads the standard input Prtty reads the environment variable TERM and looks for that termi nal in usr lib INed termcap terms bin the TEN PLUS terminal description file in order to get the sequences k2 enable printer port and k3 disable printer port SEE ALSO terms 4 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 i readfile 1 NAME Base readfile 1 readfile display structured files SYNOPSIS readfile dghstu n n files o outfile files DESCRIPTION Readfile takes a list of structured files and produces an ASCII printout of the contents of each file that illustrates their tree structure Readfile behaves like cat 1 on simple ASCII files On structured text files it prints out only the file s string data without indentation When no arguments are specified readfile reads standard input as an ASCII file The following options are recognized d T8 h 0 S n n Detailed formatted dump of the contents of the input files Convert the control characters that are used as graphics charac ters in forms to printing characters that appear similar Separate the output into sections with headers tha
108. US menu is accessed near the corner of the window and is used parts of that menu may remain visible because the editor only cleans up the screen as far as the form goes To correct the problem recom pile the form for the new screen size This is only necessary for forms that contain a great deal of invariant text such as the one for the editor profile file The dimensions of the screen can be specified in the forms profile file frmprf which is located in the directory usr lib INed profiles For example if you always use xpcterm with 80 by 45 windows specify 45 lines in your personal frmprf and recompile the problem forms Do not recompile the standard form std Store the forms in a personal directory and specify that directory in your editorprf file 4 TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Release 2 2 5 5 NEW ENVIRONMENT FOR C PROGRAMMERS The TEN PLUS User Interface includes new features that will increase the productivity of C programmers who use the TEN PLUS editor These features include a C Programming Helper and a set of utilities 5 1 C Programming Helper The C Programming Helper is automatically invoked when a C source file typically a file that has a name ending in c or h is edited It allows a programmer to edit compile and test programs without leaving the TEN PLUS editor It can only be used with the AT amp T compiler that comes with the INTERACTIVE Software Development System because it relies on the f
109. Window Positioning Functions This list summarizes the cursor and window positioning functions Moves the cursor down Moves the cursor up Moves the cursor to the right Moves the cursor to the left Moves the cursor forward to the next tab stop Moves the cursor backward to the previous tab stop Moves the cursor to the upper left hand corner of the window Moves the text one third of a window forward within the file Moves the text one third of a window back within the file PAGE Moves the text one window forward within the file Moves the text one window back within the file GO Moves the cursor to the first line of the file if at the first line moves the cursor to the last line of the file LINE FEED Positions the cursor at the beginning of the next line of a form Moves the window to the left displaying any text previously to the left of the window 2868 epg EE eggooce aj E Z Z gt ej m tui tm Moves the window to the right displaying any text previously to the right of the window TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 11 PAGE PAGE LINE LINE LEFT and enable you to scroll through a file which positions the cursor at the upper left hand corner of the window and which posi tions the cursor at the first or last line of the file are also helpful for quick movement When the cursor positioning functions 1 1 and are used and the cursor reaches the boundary of the screen
110. Z e lt E zZ c PAGE PAGE COPY PICK UP PRINT RIGHT m m m x eie d J d d Zz aSBBRERESS 3 SEE 3 5 S BA 3 o z t 8 4 8 E TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 ALT 5 on the numeric keypad ESC then ALT on the main keyboard ESC then m on the main keyboard ALT on the main keyboard ALT n on the main keyboard ESC then n on the main keyboard ALT 1 on the numeric keypad ALT 4 on the numeric keypad ALT ERASE EOL EOF to the left of the main keyboard ERASE EOL EOF to the left of the main keyboard ALT p on the main keyboard ESC then p on the main keyboard ALT ERASE EOS to the left of the main keyboard ERASE EOS to the left of the main keyboard ALT z ESC then q on the main keyboard ALT y on the main keyboard ALT 8 on the numeric keypad ALT r on the main keyboard Ho ESC then r on the main keyboard ESC then s on the main keyboard ALT 3 on the numeric keypad ALT 6 on the numeric keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 25 ESC then v on the main keyboard i on the main keyboard ALT t on the main keyboard ESC then t on the main keyboard ALT u on the main keyboard WINDOW ALT w on the main keyboard ALT j on the main keyboard ZOOM OUT ALT k on the main keyboard If you are using an IBM 3101 2X terminal the following key sequences are also available Function Keystrokes ENTER PRINT MSG to the left of the main keyboard PRINT MSG to the left
111. acement of the letter 1 on the tab grid above the window Access your report file 1 t t t Preliminary report by Pat AS you can see I got the hang of the system right away It s so fast and easy I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past not so reliable either I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can usr larry report INSERT Line 1 22 v The left hand margin can be set at any column to the right of column 1 The cursor must however be somewhere within the win dow All text entered after the margin is changed wraps to the new left
112. actice INSERT Line 10 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 Now you can type in the names and descriptions of your practice files and use ZOOM IN to create them just as you created the status file in your home directory TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 11 EDITING FILES AND DIRECTORIES The TEN PLUS environment offers a range of editing tools based on the use of six TEN PLUS functions ICK UP PUT DOWN PICK COPY PUT COPY d Using PICK UP and PUT DOWN PICK UP is used with PUT DOWN to move text To see how this is done create the file priorities inthe practice directory Enter this text into the file Priority list of tasks to be accomplished before Account Group meeting Obtain cost figures for three inventory profiles Review copy for ad campaign Memo to George about comments for ad campaign Write outline for presentation Reminder follow up on getting projection charts from Art Department usr larry practice priorities INSERT Line To move the line Write outline for presentation to the top of the list position the cursor on that line and use PICK UP The entire line is picked up and disappears from the screen 12 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 Priority list of tasks to be accomplished before Account Group meeting Obtain cost figures for three inventory profiles Review copy for ad campaign Memo to George about comments for ad campaign Reminder follow up on getting projection ch
113. age Such as Our long list of standard features will raise your standard of living more than you ever thought possible for just 1 500 down I ll buy two for my kids right nowl usr larry report INSERT Line TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 19 New left and right hand margins set during an editing session last only until you exit the TEN PLUS environment If you exit the TEN PLUS environment and then reaccess a file the margins are set to the default columns Reset the left and right hand margins as required 3 3 Changing Both Margins Simultaneously You can change both the left and right hand margins in one step by cursor defining the width and positioning of the desired text block 1 Move the cursor to the column in which the new left hand margin is to be located then use ENTER 2 Use gt or to move the cursor to the column in which the new right hand margin is to be set 3 Use MARGIN You can turn off word wrap by clearing the margins To clear the margins l Position the cursor in the same column as the left hand margin 2 Use ENTER MARGIN Note that the 1 and r markers on the tab grid are removed To reset the default margins after clearing them l Move the cursor to the default right hand margin position 2 Use ENTER MARGIN Note that the margins must be cleared before ENTER MARGIN can be used to restore the default margins Practice clearing the margins and set
114. aight text files Prior to this release printing the information stored in a TEN PLUS structured file could be problematic This was because it was only possible to print one record at a time and in the same format as the information was displayed on the screen With release 2 2 5 three new utilities catsf sortsf and prtsf are provided to remedy this problem These utilities are described briefly below Refer to the appropriate manual entries for more details about these utilities The catsf program creates a new TEN PLUS file that contains records from one or more existing TEN PLUS files as selected by the user For example a user can create a new mailbox file con taining only those messages that were sent to him by user angela The sortsf program sorts the records in a TEN PLUS file according to the values of the field specified by the user Its behavior is quite similar to that of the UNIX System sort pro gram Users can sort their mailboxes by items such as subject or date The prtsf program is a simple report generator It can be used to prepare documents or printouts when piped into the 1p command Users can specify which text should go into the document and where the text should be inserted Documents can be generated using text from all records in the file or only those records selected by the user Here is an example of a format description that can be used to gen erate a document that lists all mail messages received
115. also specify redirection of standard input and or standard out put gt gt gt lt Note however that if the Type is popbox the last field cannot contain an interactive command one requiring additional input from the user If an interactive command is accidentally provided try using BREAK or to interrupt the process when the option is selected User prompts are strings of underlined characters When the editor processes a menu item it puts each prompt into a popup box Before executing the requested action the editor replaces the prompt with whatever the user types into the box If the user uses CANCEL the editor returns to normal editing For example TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 5 assume that your system has a program called phone that takes one argument the name to look up in a phone directory The menu line to run this program might look like this Look up a phone number popbox phone Enter name When you select this item the editor displays this popup box icr dass If you type in Bob and EXECUTE the editor runs the program phone Bob Note that the prompt contains an underlined space character This is used to display a multiword prompt You can also display several prompts by separating them with nonunderlined space characters for example command argl arg2 arg3 last arg If you ZOOM IN to the first line on the MENU Options screen the editor displays the next level of detail De
116. ame punctuation To search for a particular word or words at which the cursor is not yet positioned 1 Use ENTER 2 Type the word or words 3 Use SEARCH or SEARCH Avoid unnecessary typing by searching for the shortest possible unique string within the word or string you wish to locate For example type SPE to search for SPECIAL or The sing to search for The single when the word single appears often in the file This is an efficient way to reach the next revision point During a search the searched for word or string is stored in the search buffer Thereafter search for the next occurrence of the word or string by using or SEARCH without ENTER When no further occurrences of the word or string are found the system responds Search failed on string string TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 51 The system searches for an exact character match For example a search for the word office finds offices but not Office because of the capital O To find both occurrences of the word search for fice Searches are done within single lines words or strings that split across lines are not found For example a search for home directory will not find occurrences of that string where a line ends with home and the next line begins with directory Practice searching for specific text using SEARCH and SEARCH 1 GO TO the beginning of the file 2 Use ENTER Condos SEARCH to search forward for the word
117. ample you can have a subdirectory called letters which contains all the outgoing letters you ve written The letters subdirectory can also contain a number of other subdirectories one for each of your major projects For example there could be a quik sell subdirectory under letters which contains all the letters related to the QuikSell project Here is a typical home directory listing TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 3 File Name Field Description Field INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item belo and ZOOM IN to see it First Report on the QuikSell Company Policies File Outgoing Letters Directory f uar larry INSERT Line Full File Name Cursor If you are a new user your home directory may not show any files because you have not yet created any Take a moment to study the display shown above paying particular attention to the labels identifying specific elements on the screen Some screens may differ in minor ways The cursor is a pointer to where the next character will appear As you type each character appears at the cursor position and the cursor moves one space to the right Entering text is simi lar to typing with a typewriter However in most cases in the TEN PLUS system when you reach the right hand margin the cursor and the word being typed move automatically to the next line This feature is called word wrap You can of course end a line before you reach the right hand margin
118. and computers in the next 50 lines of text use the sequence 501 rp1l Cc omputers 9 3 Formatting Tex FORMAT uses a fast internal algorithm for formatting the para graph containing the cursor Text is filled according to the margins and is not justified The lines are stored in the wastebasket buffer and can be restored to their preformatted state with RESTORE 9 4 Setting Margins MARGIN Margins are indicated on the screen by the characters 1 and r above the top border of the window Margins are reset using MARGIN MARGIN or horizontal motion MARGIN sets the left hand margin at the current cur sor column sets the right hand margin at the current cursor column horizontal motion sets the left hand margin to the left edge of the cursor defined area and the right hand margin to the right edge Word wrap automatically moves words extending beyond the right hand margin to the left hand margin of the next line The contents of the next line move to the right or down one line before the word TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 33 is moved Word wrap is enabled unless the right hand margin is removed Changes in margin settings are effective only during the current editing session If the file is exited and reentered the default mar gins are restored 9 5 Centering Text CENTER Text is centered using CENTER ENTER n CENTER or ENTER vertical motion CENTER CENTER centers the current line bet
119. apped normal text ubyte Num attribute byte for memory mapped underlined text The terminal capabilities that are not standard sequences found in etc termcap are flagged with asterisks There are many more termi nal capabilities that are defined by termcap however those that are not listed here are not used by the editor The tconvert 1 program is used to convert termcap defined terminal capabilities into a record array of input and output mappings in the structured def trm file The tconvert 1 program reads the first record from def trm to get the default input mappings and output graphics mappings It then reads the file etc termcap or the file the TERMCAP environment variable points to builds a record array of the termcap data while merging in the def ault input and output mappings and appends the new data to the output file The tdigest 1 program must then be used to produce a rapid access binary version of def trm named terms bin This is the data INed actually uses It is recommended that tdigest 1 be run from within INed because if tdigest 1 does not complete successfully it may produce a zero length terms bin file The zero length terms bin file would prevent the editor from being re entered Note however that tdigest 1 first backs up the existing terms bin file into terms bin bak From within the editor you can continue to make changes to the terminal descriptions and run tdigest 1 until it executes successfully
120. arch Action No action required String argument not allowed to next previous Cause You have used ENTER string or ENTER string PREVIOUS in a situation in which NEXT and PREVIOUS do not accept string arguments Action No action required Tabs not allowed inthis field Cause You have tried to use SET TAB or ENTER SET TAB in a field that does not have tabs defined This is not allowed Action No action required The available fonts are r for roman w for wordunderlining c for continuous underlining and MOT fad for graphics characters Cause You have specified an illegal argument to FONT Action Select a font from the set rwcg The current filter string is filter Cause You have used DO this instructs the editor to display this message indicating the filter last used This filter will be used if is used without any arguments Action No action required The cursor is not ona file name or character string Cause You have used the sequence ENTER to switch to another file however the cursor is not on a file name 60 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Action To switch to another file using USE either 1 use ENTER type a file name in the popup box that displays then use USE or 2 move the cursor to the name of a file displayed on the screen then use ENTER USE There are non printing characters in file Press Execute t
121. ariables F ILE PRTFILE TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 13 or PRTCMD which expands to the command entered in the Com mand field The Save all ASCII files flag should be set if all ASCII files opened during the editing session are to be saved before the command is executed If this flag is not set an attempt to print an ASCII file may not print the most recent version The Clear screen and run command flag should be set if the screen should be cleared before the command is executed The Print graphics box flag should be set if the output is to be run through a filter that will convert graphic characters to characters that the printer understands Usually converts the graphics box characters to and characters If this flag is set this conversion is not performed The Display all out put of command flag should be set if the command output should appear in a popup box 3 4 Changing Your Print Profile You can add new options to your Print Menu by editing your printprf file Sample print profile entries can be found by using and selecting the Suggestions for Print Menu option from the menu You should examine these suggestions and use PICK COPY and PUT DOWN to move the desired options to your own printprf file 14 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 4 THE FILE MANAGER PROFILE The file manager profile file indexprf allows you to customize your directory listing It is used to specify the directory with which th
122. arts from Art Department usr larry practice priorities INSERT Line Note that picks up the entire line regardless of where the cursor is positioned and moves the subsequent lines up To move the line to the top of the list position the cursor on the line Obtain cost figures for three inventory profiles then use PUT DOWN Priority list of tasks to be accomplished before Account Group meeting Write outline for presentation Obtain cost figures for three inventory profiles Review copy for ad campaign Memo to George about comments for ad campaign Reminder follow up on getting projection charts from Art Department usr larry practice priorities INSERT Line You can also transfer information from one file to another by using in conjunction with ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT First ZOOM IN to a file and the line you want Then using and ZOOM IN as appropriate access the directory containing the file into which the line is to be placed to this file and use to insert the line where you want it TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 13 You have just seen how to PICK UP and PUT DOWN one line of text at a time You can use PICK UP several times in succession followed by PUT DOWN the same number of times to move several lines of text at one time Refer to section 4 of the TEN PLUS Tutorial in this guide to learn how to pick up several lines of text in a single operation can als
123. at documents are contained in this guide and how to use the guide to your best advantage WHAT S INCLUDED The TEN PLUS User Interface Guide includes e TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Provides a description of the current release of the TEN PLUS User Interface e TEN PLUS Primer Provides a tutorial introduction on how to create and edit files and directories and how to use the basic TEN PLUS functions e TEN PLUS Tutorial Provides a detailed training guide for beginners who wish to learn how to use the TEN PLUS system The tutorial describes how to use three main features of the TEN PLUS User Interface the INed editor the File Manager and the History Display TEN PLUS Reference Manual Provides a detailed description of the components and functions of the TEN PLUS User Interface e TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Describes how the TEN PLUS functions are mapped to your keyboard e TEN PLUS Profiles Provides a training guide for users who wish to learn how to use TEN PLUS profiles to customize the TEN PLUS system 2 Introduction to the TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 e TEN PLUS User Interface Manual Entries INTERACTIVE s proprietary manual entries which supplement the INTERACTIVE UNIX System V 386 Release 3 2 User s System Administrator s Reference Manual e TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Instructions Provides step by step instructions on how to install and configure the TEN PLUS User Interfac
124. at for the next two tab stops 4 Settabs 10 and 20 characters from the left hand margin 3 7 Underscoring With FONT Most displays are equipped with four fonts one for typing nonun derscored words one for typing underscored words spaces and punctuation continuous underscoring one for typing underscored words only word underscoring and one for accessing a graphics character set if one is available on your display is used in conjunction with to select the various fonts for input Text already entered cannot be modified with FONT On displays that cannot show underlining underlined characters are added correctly to the file To select continuous underscoring use c FONT To select word underscoring use ENTER w FONT To select nonun derscoring use ENTER FONT The graphics characters are described in the TEN PLUS Reference Manual Although graphics characters may be viewed on the display the ability to 24 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 print them is printer dependent To select the graphics font use ENTER g FONT Once a font has been selected can be used to switch between that font the active font and the font selected immedi ately beforehand the previously active font The nonunderscore or Roman font is active whenever you enter the editor The default previously active font is continuous underscore Selection of active and previously active fonts permits all possible combina
125. at which point you can exit the editor and re enter in order to test the changes The terms bin file is read when the editor is started when returning from a full screen com mand and when returning from popup boxes that use more than the full screen TEN PLUS User Interface 3 Release 2 2 terms 4 Base FILES usr lib INed termcap def trm usr lib INed termcap terms bin etc termcap SEE ALSO tconvert 1 tdigest 1 termcap TEN PLUS User Interface 4 terms 4 Release 2 2 TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Instructions CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 2 INSTALLING THE TEN PLUS USER INTERFACE 3 SETTING THE TERMINAL ENVIRONMENT 3 1 Introduction i ae cs 3 2 Determining Your TERM Variable 3 3 Setting Your TERM Variable AARAA N e TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Instructions 1 OVERVIEW The TEN PLUS User Interface is installed on your fixed disk using the sysadm utility It takes about 1 7 MB of space and requires that the Core subset already be installed You should read the fol lowing documents before attempting to install the TEN PLUS User Interface on your system e INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System Installation Instructions e INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System Maintenance Procedures e INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System Primer These documents were delivered with your INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System 2 TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Release 2 2 2 INSTALLING
126. ather than illustrations I envision a Scene with one prop against a white background A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so goodl This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for Also about the Cornerstone Condos concept Homes Built To Last misses the mark These are inexpensive condos whose biggest selling point is their usr larry report INSERT Line 11 44 v 10 Use to fill the paragraph 4 13 Moving Words Lines and Paragraphs is used to move words lines or sentences It removes the text and places it in the pick buffer To relocate the text position the cursor at the new location and use PUT DOWN The last picked up text is placed at the cursor position To move a single line use PICK UP position the cursor at the new location and use PUT DOWN To move words sentences lines or paragraphs use or to cursor define the area before using PICK UP Practice using PICK UP and PUT DOWN to move single lines 1 Use ENTER GO TO to move to the end of the file 2 Beginning on line 47 type 44 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 I read it all and it looks ok to me Are we going to get together in the next few days to discuss a
127. ave edited the latest version of this file is processed 2 4 HELP Options To access the HELP Options part of your profile ZOOM OUT to the top level of your profile move the cursor down to HELP Options then HELP Options Description shown in menu Type Name of file or program Alphabetic List of Editor Commands SYS help e cmds How do I SYS help e howtos How to Customize the Editing System SYS help editorprf hdq Suggestions for Your MENU SYS help emenu Suggestions for Print Menu SYS help prthelp Keyboard Layouts SYS help keys map The HELP Options screen is used to determine what the menu for will look like The first field Description shown in menu contains the description that appears in the menu The second field Type is usually file it tells the editor to switch to the corresponding file when this item is i TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 7 selected The third field Name of file or progran contains the name of the help file to be displayed To add a HELP menu option create a help file and add the appropriate line on this screen The help file need not be installed in SYS help 2 5 Telling the Editor to Watch Specific Files The editor can be set up to watch for changes to specific files The editor is usually set up to watch either mail or reminder files for new mail or new reminders but you can have the editor watch any file When the editor notices that one of these files has chan
128. board FONT Alt f on the main keyboard F3 on the top row of keys FUNCTIONS Alt h on the main keyboard 1 on the numeric keypad 5 on the numeric keypad Home to the left of the numeric keypad or 7 on the numeric keypad 1 Do not confuse this key with Delete to the left of the numeric keypad ee _ 2 Do not confuse this key with Enter to the lower right of the numeric keypad or with Enter on the main keyboard ERT MODE mj is 3 HE s DEC a s INDO JREERHRENE mI x m i a ia amp lal iS iS c Sj E bs WIS Z iz z BB d REVIOUS the numeric keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 F4 on the top row of keys Ins on the numeric keypad Alt a on the main keyboard Alt 1 on the main keyboard 3 on the numeric keypad 9 on the numeric keypad Ctrl jon the main keyboard F2 on the top row of keys Alt m on the main keyboard F 1 on the top row of keys Alt 1 on the numeric keypad Alt n on the main keyboard Alt 3 on the numeric keypad Alt 9 on the numeric keypad F7 on the top row of keys F5 on the top row of keys Alt 7 on the numeric keypad Alt at the top of the numeric keypad F8 on the top row of keys F6 on the top row of keys Ctrl on the main keyboard Alt q on the main keyboard Do not confuse this key with Insert to the left of the numeric keypad or with Ins on Do not confuse this key with Page Down to the left of the numeric keypad Do not confuse this key with Page Up to the left of the n
129. by holding down the Ctrl key and touching q To log out from the system level hold down the Ctrl key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes Shift F1 on the top row of keys Shift F2 on the top row of keys Shift F3 on the top row of keys Shift F4 on the top row of keys Shift F5 on the top row of keys Shift F6 on the top row of keys Shift F7 on the top row of keys Shift F8 on the top row of keys 8 on the numeric keypad 6 on the numeric keypad EJ 1 EJ B BJ i ES S el RS E 2 on the numeric keypad 8 The arrow keys on the top of the Esprit keyboard are not guaranteed to perform these functions c TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 29 4 on the numeric keypad Bs on the top right of the keyboard or on the top row of keys N LINE Func 4 on the numeric keypad Func b on the keyboard Break above the numeric keypad CANCEL on the right of the numeric keypad Func c on the keyboard w m m m IB mmi m Rm c S mp E gt i5 I5 m s tz d az d gt a 8 Del on the right of the keyboard Func on the numeric keypad DELETE CHARACTER on the numeric keypad Func x on the keyboard Func 6 on the numeric keypad Enter on the right of the numeric keypad Enter on the right of the numeric keypad EXIT Func d on the keyboard S 4 Func f on the keyboard F3 on the top row of keys Func h on the keyboard 1 on the numeric keypad 5 on the numeric keypad 7 on the numeri
130. by pressing ENTER ENTER moves the cursor to the beginning of the next line The File field contains the names of the files and directories stored in the displayed directory A file usually contains a sin gle document such as a report or a memorandum A directory is also a file but it is a special type of file that can contain other files The Description field allows you to supply a short descrip tion of the file or directory You should limit file and directory names to 10 characters File names can contain any characters other than J 7 4 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 and space File names must not start with a hyphen or a plus The full file name completely describes the location of the file in the system Slashes are used to separate directory names and filenames The full file name is displayed at the bottom of the screen and when you attempt to create a new file Using ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT to move around within a directory structure ZOOM IN moves you to a lower level in the directory structure and you to a higher level To move from a directory to a file or direc tory in the next lower level position the cursor on the line on which the file or directory is listed and ZOOM IN To move from a file or directory to the directory in the next higher level ZOOM OUT It does not matter where the cursor is positioned in the file or direc tory when you ZOOM OUT Using the Cursor Pos
131. c keypad F4 on the top row of keys INSERT MODE 0 on the numeric keypad mj P aa eee ag el Eas gt 3 98 S g 2 un Func a on the keyboard z 4 Func 1 on the keyboard E Z el 3 on the numeric keypad 30 FEED i PAGE PICK UP RE Ji i 7 il z S pe iw e FHL S as e a8 JE i Z nr 2 qc i z 9 This is an alternate key sequence TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 9 on the numeric keypad LINE FEED on the keyboard F2 on the top row of keys Func m on the keyboard F 1 on the top row of keys Func 1 on the numeric keypad Func n on the keyboard Func 3 on the numeric keypad Func 9 on the numeric keypad F7 on the top row of keys F5 on the top row of keys Func 7 on the numeric keypad Send above the numeric keypad F8 on the top row of keys F6 on the top row of keys Ctrlq Clear A11 above the numeric keypad Func z on the keyboard Func 5 on the numeric keypad Func 0 on the numeric keypad Return on the right of the keyboard Func r on the keyboard Func s on the keyboard Func 2 on the numeric keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 31 Func 8 on the numeric keypad AB Func v on the keyboard Tab on the left of the keyboard sl le Shift Tab on the left of the keyboard Func t on the keyboard g m je Z F 11 on the top row of keys Func u on the keyboard Func w on the keyboard F9 on the top row of keys F 10 on th
132. ccomplished by replacing spaces within short lines with multiple spaces The l flag sets the right margin for ffill or fjust at column n The default is 65 SEE ALSO e 1 TEN PLUS Reference Manual BUGS Ffill and fjust set the left margin incorrectly if the first line of any paragraph is more than twice as long as the specified right margin Incorrect output is produced for input lines longer than 512 characters TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 Q filters 1 Base filters 1 NAME filters filters to be used with the TEN PLUS editor SYNOPSIS box width unbox indent count undent count space count unspace tab filename untab filename DESCRIPTION The box filter puts a box of stars around its input It is particularly useful to C programmers because these boxes are valid as comment sections for the C programming language The optional width argu ment can be used to specify the width of the box The default width is 78 The unbox filter removes the box of stars previously created with box from around the input The indent filter indents all input lines by a given amount of spaces If no amount is specified as an argument to the indent command the indentation will be 8 columns to the right The undent filter removes up to a given number of spaces from the input lines The default is 8 spaces a different amount can be given as an argument The space filter adds two blank lines aft
133. ce of ext 25 8 Use BOX MARK to move the cursor to the last line in the list 9 Use to move the cursor across to the e in the second occurrence of ext 19 then use DELETE The column is deleted 4 17 Moving to a Specific Line in a File To move directly to a specific line in a file 1 Use ENTER 2 Typethe number of the desired line 3 Use GO TO 50 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Practice moving to a specific line in the file When you feel com fortable with the procedure use ENTER GO TO to return to the end of the file 4 18 Searching for Specific Text The fastest way to locate specific text throughout a document is by searching To initiate a search for occurrences of a character string word or group of words search forward with or back ward with SEARCH To search for ther occurrences of a specific word showing in the window l Position the cursor at the beginning of the word 2 Use ENTER SEARCH to search from the cursor position to the end of the file Use SEARCH to search from the cursor position to the beginning of the file The system only searches for one word the word at the cursor posi tion A word includes any punctuation within or immediately fol lowing the word at the cursor position Thus if the cursor is posi tioned on a word followed by a punctuation mark and a search is initiated the system only searches for occurrences of the word that include the s
134. ckward down a full screen at a time n PAGE scrolls the text backward n full screens For example 3 PAGE scrolls the text backward three full screens Displays a menu of print options Redraws the screen display Restores at the current cursor position the most recently DELETE d text Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next line Brings into view a portion approximately one third of the width of the screen of the SEARCH SE SET TAB S TEXT MARK USE TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 file that extends beyond the right hand border Saves all changes made to files during this editing session or since the last SAVE Searches forward through the file for a specified word or phrase For example Sam SEARCH searches for the next occurrence of the word Sam subse quent occurrences of Sam can be found by using SEARCH alone Searches backward through the file for a specified word or phrase Like SEARCH can be used alone to find subsequent occurrences of the word or phrase Sets a tab stop at the current cursor posi tion SET TAB removes the tab stop at the current cursor position Moves the cursor to the next tab position on the right Moves the cursor to the previous tab posi tion on the left Marks text for copying inserting or delet ing Can be used with cursor positioning and other TEN PLUS functions such as PICK UP PICK COPY INSERT and t
135. cr Str carriage return dc Str delete char dl Str delete line ei Str end insert mode g0 Str graphics ULC underline char gl Str graphics VBAR vertical bar g2 Str graphics LLC lower left corner g3 Str graphics URC upper right corner g4 Str graphics LRC lower right corner g5 Str graphics HBAR horizontal bar g6 Str graphics TEE g7 Str graphics INVTEE inverted tee g8 Str graphics TEEONL tee on left g9 Str graphics TEEONR tee on right ge Str graphics mode off gs Str graphics mode off ho Str home cursor ic Str insert char TEN PLUS User Interface 2 Release 2 2 terms 4 Base terms 4 im Str insert mode on ip Str pad after insert char is Str terminal initialization string nd Str cursor right nl Str newline ti Str terminal initialization part 2 te Str undoes effects of is ti uc Str underline following character ue Str underline mode off uk Str unlock terminals up Str cursor up us Str underline mode on xO Str graphics CROSS xl Str graphics blot region start mark ee Bool EXECUTE at top level means ENTER fe Bool Filter in a menu means EXECUTE df Bool disable flow control s q gu Str unknown graphics char gd Str graphics dot ANSI Bool does the terminal support ansi style seqs NOSTRIP Bool should we turn off istrip and get 8 bits md Bool memory mapped screen supported abyte Num attribute byte for memory m
136. create a file when the disk is full Action Contact your system administrator Cannot edit a index file Cause You have attempted to edit a file whose name is either index or ends with index You are not allowed to edit these files Action Select another file to edit Cannot edit a special file Cause You are attempting to edit a special UNIX System file This might be a non editable directory or device The editor is not capable of editing these Action Select another file to edit Cannot edit directory directory without read and execute permission Cause You have attempted to edit a directory in which you do not have read or execute permission Action Change the access permissions or ask your system administrator to change them so that you have read and execute permission then try again Cannot edit file beginning with Cause You have attempted to edit a file that has the charac ters at the beginning of the file name These files cannot be edited Action Select another file to edit 50 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Cannot edit file filename without read permission Cause You do not have permission to read filename Action Use LOCAL MENU to change the file s permission bits and re edit it Cannot find help message file for this application Cause You have used while in a TEN PLUS applica tion and the system is unable to locate the help mes sage file for
137. ction to the TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 3 CONVENTIONS USED Numbers preceded by the symbol refer to section numbers within that document OVERVIEW OF THE TEN PLUS USER INTERFACE The TEN PLUS User Interface is a fully integrated user environ ment that makes INTERACTIVE UNIX System V 386 Release 3 2 easy to learn and easy to use The TEN PLUS User Interface pro vides ten basic functions plus a number of more advanced func tions The basic functions allow you to perform most tasks simply and productively while the advanced functions permit you to gradu ally learn more complex tasks The TEN PLUS User Interface runs on a wide range of computers including personal computers multi user micros minis and main frames You obtain the maximum power from your computer system in a way that is easy to use The TEN PLUS functions are consistent which means it is not necessary to learn a new set of commands each time you use a new application or try a new task The same command will have the same result regardless of whether you are reading a mail message writing a computer program or updating your calendar On some systems TEN PLUS functions are invoked solely through keys on the keyboard On other systems some TEN PLUS functions and operations can be invoked by using a mouse If your system is equipped with a mouse consult the appropriate operating manual for specific instructions TEN PLUS USER INTERFACE FEATURES The
138. cursor position to the end of the line The deleted text is added to the wastebasket buffer 7 19 and can be retrieved with RESTORE 7 7 Duplicating Lines or Areas PICK COPY places a copy of the current line in the pick buffer and moves the cursor down one line is similar in function o PICK UP except that the lines or regions are copied to the pick buffer and are not removed from the file does not alter the file being edited n PICK COPY where n is a positive numeric argument places n lines beginning with the current line in the pick buffer and moves the cursor down 7 lines If the specified number of lines extends beyond the end of the file a sufficient number of blank lines is supplied to provide a total of n lines to the buffer can also be used in conjunction with a cursor defined argument 88 2 to copy either a specific number of lines or a block into the pick buffer If lines are indicated the effect is the same as n PICK COPY except that the cursor does not move If an area is defined it is placed in the buffer as a group of partial TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 21 lines and can be inserted within lines by using PUT COPY or PUT DOWN 7 8 Any text to the right of the insertion is moved to the right 7 8 Placing Text in a File PUT COPY and PUT DOWN places a copy of the newest contents of the pick buffer at the cursor position leaving the buffer unaffected moves the newest contents
139. cursor to next line Pick up CCL and add it to buffer Move window so CCL is the first line in window or last line in window Display the local menu data specific task Set right margin at current cursor column Enables word wrap if right margin is to the right of the left margin Display the New Task Menu The last window becomes the current Begin definition of cursor defined argument ERROR Pick up the part of CCL starting with cursor position replace it with the line below CCL and place it in the buffer J X is positive Move window forward or backward X lines Display the local menu data specific task ERROR Execute command X display the results in a popup box if possible X is positive Display the Xth item in a list ERROR X is positive Move window forward or backward X pages X is positive Place copy of X lines starting with CCL in buffer X is positive Pick up X lines starting with CCL and put them in buffer 2 Action of ENTER motion FUNCTION motion is a combination of cursor positioning functions Allow cursor defined region to span horizontal screen boundary ERROR ERROR Set left margin to left edge of the cursor defined area and right margin to right edge ERROR ERROR ERROR Allow cursor defined region to span horizontal screen boundary Place lines or block defined by cursor in buffer Pick up l
140. d The file specifier filename may consist of up to four arguments as follows filename Specifies a file filename line Specifies the line number ine at which the cursor is to be positioned If zero is specified line one is assumed filename line col Specifies the line number line and column number col where the cursor should be initially positioned filename line col searchkey Specifies the line ine and column number co where the cursor should be initially positioned A is then executed to find the next occurrence of the search key search key Use filename 0 0 searchkey to specify a search from the beginning of the file On systems that have a terminal description file the shell variables TERM and TDESC may be used The shell variable TERM may be used to indicate the terminal type in the terminal description file The shell vari able TDESC may be used to specify the full path name of an alternative terminal description file to be used in place of the default The alternative terminal description file must have been produced by tdigest 1 The ar option can be used if the TEN PLUS editor runs in a window ing environment that supports the resizing of windows When a user resizes the window the TEN PLUS editor window will also be resized For usage details see the TEN PLUS Reference Manual TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 e 1 Base e 1 FILES usr lib INed profiles editorprf system ed
141. d ESC then 9 on the right keypad F7 on the function keypad F5 on the function keypad a ESC then 7 on the right keypad ESC then PRINT on the right keypad F8 on the function keypad F6 on the function keypad CTRL Von the keyboard ESC then q on the keyboard ol ie rs d 2 Sl iG foal bl m m amp mss el EE e iO 19 gt mi te v a S iQ S la lel la S BS 5 ial 2 qs 9 ne Z E a e d 1S z lt E amp CTRL z on the keyboard 13 Do not confuse this key with MENU above the keyboard 14 Do not confuse this key with PRINT above the keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 49 ESC then 5 on the right keypad ESC then 0 on the right keypad RETURN on the right of the keyboard ESC then r on the keyboard ESC then s on the keyboard ESC then 2 on the right keypad ESC then 8 on the right keypad SET ESC then v on the keyboard c Ii n It p v m mI A i JRE EE EBE EERE de a E E S mie 2 amp B 2 E G TAB on the left of the keyboard SHIFT TAB on the left of the keyboard CTRL t on the keyboard ESC then u on the keyboard ESC then w on the keyboard F9 on the function keypad ZOOM OUT F 10 on the function keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 51 Appendix TERMINAL DESCRIPTION FILES This appendix contains technical information about the terminal description files located in the termcaps database It is included as a reference for system programmers it is not necessar
142. d 9 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 5 2 4 Exiting the TEN PLUS Environment To exit the TEN PLUS environment use EXIT If the system is configured to enter directly into the TEN PLUS environment EXIT will log you out If the system is not configured to enter directly into the TEN PLUS environment this brings the system to the com mand level indicated by the system prompt To reenter the TEN PLUS environment and return to the editing session type e and press the ENTER key When you EXIT all files edited during the session are saved If the file is an ASCII file the editor renames the previous version of the file by truncating the file name to 10 characters if necessary and then appending bak If an old bak file exists it is overwritten If the file is a structured file the previous version is retained as part of the history Unmodified files are not rewritten Files are considered modified if any printing characters are typed while editing the file even if they do not result in an alteration of the contents For example using the space bar a printing character instead of causes a file to be saved even if the intent is merely to examine it Use q to exit an ASCII file without saving the changes Note that changes to all ASCII files edited since the last save will be canceled To recover a previous version of a file use the bak file for ASCII files or the History Display for structured files
143. d A location in a file or form that is reserved for a single piece of information For example a personnel file might include separate fields for an employee s name address Social Security number and so on Each TEN PLUS directory screen has two fields File and Description 32 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 file A document or a collection of information stored on the computer For example a file could be a phone list a memorandum or a report full file name The full file name of the file completely describes the location of the file in the system It is also called a full path name It is made up of directory names and file names separated by slashes The full file name is displayed at the bottom of the screen and when you attempt to create a new file function A way of performing an often complex operation with one or more keystrokes which usually saves you from having to perform a series of steps home directory The directory that contains the master list or index of the information you are storing on the computer keyboard template An illustration of a keyboard that indicates the loca tions of the keys used to invoke functions log in Activate your computer or terminal to gain access to your information popup box A small box on your screen that displays instructions or error messages scroll Move text off of the display so that you can see the preceding or following text When you reach the bot
144. d and option can be used when TEN PLUS is invoked in an INTERACTIVE MultiView window For consistency the command line option is now named ar instead of autoresize TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Release 2 2 5 3 4 NEW TEN PLUS FORMS FEATURES 4 1 TEN PLUS Forms TEN PLUS makes extensive use of forms that define the layout of the screen A TEN PLUS form consists of two parts an area for invariant text and an area for data entry The part of the form that contains invariant text usually contains items such as descriptive text and titles When a file is created using a TEN PLUS form the invariant text cannot be modified The other part of the form is to enter data Modifications can be made to this part of a file created with a TEN PLUS form 4 2 Forms Compiler The forms compiler is a program that compiles a TEN PLUS source form into a more compact binary file that is used by the TEN PLUS editor A TEN PLUS source form can be edited and translated so that all of the invariant text appears in the user s own language Source forms continue to be supplied with the TEN PLUS User Interface and the forms compiler is now also part of the User Inter face This allows the user to make compiled versions of translated forms Refer to fc 1 for information about how to use the forms compiler 4 3 Support for Large Screens When forms are used on screens larger than they were intended for problems may occur For example if a TEN PL
145. d for interactive text processing are covered separately in 9 7 1 Inserting Characters INSERT MODE The INed editor has two modes overwrite and insert The mode affects all printing characters including the space character as well as the action of BACKSPACE 87 4 In overwrite mode a typed character is placed at the cursor posi tion overwriting any previously existing character In insert mode a typed character is inserted at the cursor position and the charac ters at and to the right of that position move one position to the right no characters are deleted If the line extends beyond the right hand margin the last word on the line wraps to the next line 89 4 In overwrite mode INSERT MODE changes the mode to insert in insert mode INSERT MODE changes the mode to overwrite 7 2 Inserting Lines and Areas Splitting Lines INSERT INSERT inserts a blank line at the cursor line and moves the cur sor line and the lines below it down one line For all variations of INSERT the cursor always returns to the position it occupied before INSERT was used TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 19 ENTER n INSERT where n is a positive numeric argument inserts n blank lines at the cursor line and moves the cursor line and the lines below it down 7 lines ENTER INSERT splits the current line by moving the characters at and to the right of the cursor position to a new next line and all subsequent lines
146. d on the keyboard Alt f on the keyboard F3 on the function keypad Alt h on the keyboard 1 on the numeric keypad 5 on the numeric keypad 7 on the numeric keypad F4 on the function keypad MODE Ins on the numeric keypad Alt a on the keyboard Alt 1 on the keyboard EEE ERE a gg 3 on the numeric keypad 6 Do not confuse this key with Enter on the right of the keyboard 12 l E d e Je eae ee S fe fs fx i m E SEP E BEBBSRARREBE a RB EE IG REE 3B A 2H EG i z I lt 2 ne v e LOCAL ME MARGIN PAGE PAGE PREVIOU PRINT d REPLACE ES SET TAB TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 9 on the numeric keypad Ctrl j on the keyboard F2 on the function keypad Alt m on the keyboard F 1 on the function keypad Alt 1 on the numeric keypad Alt n on the keyboard Alt 3 on the numeric keypad Alt 9 on the numeric keypad F7 on the function keypad F5 on the function keypad Alt 7 on the numeric keypad Alt to the right of the numeric keypad F8 on the function keypad F6 on the function keypad Ctrl on the keyboard Alt q on the keyboard Alt z on the keyboard Alt 5 on the numeric keypad Alt Ins on the numeric keypad Enter on the right of the keyboard Alt r on the keyboard Alt s on the keyboard Alt 2 on the numeric keypad Alt 8 on the numeric keypad Alt v on the keyboard on the left of the keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 13 Shif
147. d wrap by removing the margins as described in 3 3 2 On the third line position the cursor on the period after the word system 3 Insert the text in just a few short hours The text to the right of the insert moves beyond the right hand window border 28 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 t t t Preliminary report by Pat As you can see I got the hang of the system in just a few short hours easy I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel paper in the past I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can usr larry report INSERT Line get v gt Note
148. ding fi the Sales Conference next week I know that she s working on getting the display materials ready for the TransCorp presentation next month but if you could spare her I think it would be a valuable experience for her internship and an asset to us if we hire her upon graduation One of the problems with a lot of MBAs when they get out of school is that they don t have a good feel for the personal side of business I think it would be good for Lisa to get some of this exposure What do you think Will the TransCorp schedule permit usr larry practice memo INSERT Line wr If touching the space bar does not move the text to the right read the section Alternating Between Insert and Overwrite Modes later on in this primer Use a blank line to separate paragraphs With the cursor on the line One of the use INSERT A blank line is inserted I wanted to solicit your thoughts about the possibility of Lisa attending the Sales Conference next week I know that she s working on getting the display materials ready for the TransCorp presentation next month but if you could spare her I think it would be a valuable experience for her internship and an asset to us if we hire her upon graduation One of the problems with a lot of MBAs when they get out of school is that they don t have a good feel for the personal side of business I think it would be good for Lisa to get some of this exposure What do you think Will the Tra
149. directory by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the file is listed and using PICK COPY The cursor will move down one line Position the cursor where the copy is to be placed and use PUT DOWN An instruction box with the message File name filename already exists Press CANCEL to abort file restore or enter a new name appears on the display Type the new file name at the cur sor position and use EXECUTE The file is copied into the current directory and listed on the File Manager screen at the cursor posi tion You can also copy multiple files using BOX MARK or ENTER vertical motion with PICK COPY and PUT DOWN To copy a file into another directory access that directory using the procedure described in 3 9 before using PUT DOWN In TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 7 this case the file name usually will not be duplicated so the instruc tion box will not display 3 5 Moving Files Files are moved by positioning the cursor in any field on the line on which the file is listed and using PICK UP The file is removed from the directory listing and the files listed below it move up one line Change to the directory where the file is to be located using the procedures described in 3 9 and use PUT DOWN The file is moved into the current directory and listed on the File Manager screen at the cursor position You can also move multiple files using BOX MARK or vertical motion with PICK
150. display help information Show home directory Execute UNIX shell commands Run a shell command in a box Show your profiles directory Edit your editor profile Housekeep Display history of current file usr larry INSERT Line 2 With the cursor on Show home directory use EXECUTE you will return to the File Manager display in your home directory You can move quickly to your home directory from any other location by selecting this option from the New Task Menu See 5 for a discussion of the other options on the New Task Menu 2 3 Creating a File To create and access a new file using the TEN PLUS system 1 With the cursor at the beginning of the first blank line in the File field type the file name If you make a typographical error use to correct the error then continue typing Use only alphanumeric characters and the symbols and and when naming a file File names should not con tain spaces Use the name report for this example 2 or use gt to move the cursor to the first position in the Description field 3 Type a brief description in the Description field For example type First Report on the QuikSell Project 4 ZOOM IN Since the report file does not yet exist a menu will appear we TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 7 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages ph
151. display on the menu displayed by because you cannot from the editing window of a text file The complete menu displayed by typically looks like this 12 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Functions Menu Move the cursor to the desired function and touch EXECUTE Touch CANCEL to do nothing HELP for help MENU LOCAL MENU INSERT PICK COPY PUT COPY PICK UP PUT DOWN FORMAT ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT 2 8 Using the TEN PLUS ENTER Function ENTER is used to modify the meaning of other functions Although you will not be using ENTER extensively until later this exercise provides an example of how to use it 1 GO TO the beginning of the report file 2 Locate the key s used for ENTER on the TEN PLUS template 3 Locate the key s used for LINE Remember LINE scrolls the text forward in the file 4 Use ENTER the cursor moves into a popup box and ENTER displays in the box 5 Type the number 30 Note that on some keyboards the numeric keypad is used only to access functions in which case numeric data is entered via the numbered keys on the main keyboard Refer to the layout template for your keyboard 6 Use LINE The cursor advances 30 lines to the 31st line of the file 7 The effect of number LINE is different from that of alone Use only LINE the text scrolls about one third of a window forward Note that you can use CANCEL or use again to cancel an ENTER sequence at any time before c
152. ditor commands will appear Additional information about each of the editor com mands can be accessed by moving the cursor to the line on which the desired command is listed and using ZOOM IN to return to the list of editor commands TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 97 3 Use USE to return to the File Manager display or the editing session depending on where you were when HELP was used Practice using HELP until you are comfortable with its use e 1 ZOOM IN to the report file then use HELP 2 Select Keyboard Layouts A display showing a list of keyboards will appear You can access a particular keyboard layout by moving the cursor to the line on which the desired keyboard is listed and using ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT to return to the list of keyboards 3 Use to return to the editing session 8 2 Communicating With the System While in the TEN PLUS Environment The TEN PLUS system eliminates most of the requirements for communicating directly with the UNIX System since most TEN PLUS operations are performed with functions instead of com mands Files and directories can be created edited copied moved and deleted with the basic TEN PLUS functions There are how m ever a number of system commands available while in the TEN PLUS environment that perform a variety of useful functions and provide specific information about the system A few of the more common system commands are provided in this section as examples Oth
153. drive The system asks you to confirm that this is the package you want to install Use RETURN to start the installation process Install the TEN PLUS USER INTERFACE package y Installing the TEN PLUS USER INTERFACE Copyright c 1987 AT amp T All Rights Reserved The following files are being installed usr bin cleandir usr bin e usr bin ffill usr bin ghost usr lib INed help histhelp usr options t1 name Floppy diskette number 1 is complete Remove floppy and insert floppy number 2 Type lt return gt when ready Remove the first diskette and insert the next one Then use RETURN to continue The following files are being installed usr lib INed help keys map usr lib INed termcap terms bin usr options t1 name Floppy diskette number 2 is complete Installation of the TENPLUS USER INTERFACE is complete You may now remove the medium from the diskette drive The names of some of the files have been omitted for the sake of brevity The TEN PLUS User Interface is now installed on your fixed disk Your terminal must be correctly configured before you can use TEN PLUS The following section explains how to configure your terminal 4 TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Release 2 2 3 SETTING THE TERMINAL ENVIRONMENT 3 1 Introduction The TEN PLUS User Interface is designed to be terminal independent and can be configured to support most terminals Before you can use the system you must determine
154. e e Reader s Comment Form Provides you with a way to tell us what you like or dislike about this guide and to send us your ideas for making it even better WHERE TO BEGIN The TEN PLUS User Interface Guide includes a variety of docu ments for users at varying levels of experience Depending on your level of experience you may want to use this guide in a number of different ways The outline below provides some suggested ways to use this guide e If you are a beginner Read through the TEN PLUS Primer or the TEN PLUS Tutorial If you want a quick introduction to the basic TEN PLUS functions try the TEN PLUS Primer If you would like a more in depth introduction to the TEN PLUS sys tem work through the TEN PLUS Tutorial If you are an experienced TEN PLUS user Read the TEN PLUS Reference Manual which offers concise descriptions of the TEN PLUS functions and how to use them or you may wish to refer to TEN PLUS Profiles to learn how to customize your TEN PLUS environment If you are installing the system Read and follow the steps outlined in the TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Instructions Once you have completed the basic system installation refer to TEN PLUS Profiles to learn how to customize your TEN PLUS environment If you want the latest system information Refer to the TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes for a listing of the the newest TEN PLUS features Introdu
155. e c exten sion e g code is the default for code c Otherwise the default is the last target name you entered The helper shows you the operations make is performing and their diagnostics The make can be interrupted at any time using BREAK 7 After make has finished you are looking at a temporary file containing the output of the compiler and the loader If you wish you can switch back and forth between the source file and this file using options 4 and 5 8 You can run the program without exiting the TEN PLUS environment by dropping into a subshell if the program is interactive running the program in a popup box or running the program as a filter on a temporary file Options 1 and 6 can both be used to compile a file There are however differences between the two Option 1 compiles the file but does not link it option 6 can do both With option 1 the helper moves the cursor to the locations in your file where the compiler has caught errors the helper cannot do that if you use option 6 Another significant difference between options 1 and 6 is how these two options handle structured files Since the C compiler does not understand structured files it is important to convert the file to ASCII before doing the make This can be done by using option 1 which also does a readfile 1 if the file is structured or by adding an explicit readfile command to Makefile You can avoid considerations about whether
156. e TERM to the type of the appropriate terminal To avoid setting the TERM variable at each login set it in an individual profile file in each user s login directory e g HOME profile TEN PLUS Profiles CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1 1 Accessing TEN PLUS Functions THE EDITOR PROFILE 2 1 Creating Your Editor Profile 2 2 The Top Level of the Editor Profile 2 3 MENU Options E 5 2 4 HELP Options 2 5 Telling the Editor to Watch Specific F Files 2 6 Editor Search Paths THE PRINT PROFILE 3 1 Creating Your Print Profile 3 2 The Top Level of the Print Profile 3 3 Print Option Details CS 3 4 Changing Your Print Profile THE FILE MANAGER PROFILE 4 1 Creating Your File Manager Profile 4 2 The Top Level of the File Manager Profile ONNWNNN TEN PLUS Profiles 1 INTRODUCTION This document is intended as a training guide for those who wish to learn how to use TEN PLUS profiles to customize their TEN PLUS environment It is intended for those who have already used the TEN PLUS system to create edit and manage text files Readers of this document should refer to the TEN PLUS Primer the TEN PLUS Tutorial and the TEN PLUS Reference Manual in this guide as appropriate to their needs 1 1 Accessing TEN PLUS Functions Accessing TEN PLUS functions requires different keystroke sequences on different keyboards Refer to the appropriate section of TEN PLUS Keyboard Info
157. e a popup box is in the window additional information about the information in the box appears on the display After you have selected one of the options from the menu to continue editing 6 3 Accessing the Operating System and Other Files MENU is used to simplify certain operations and access the operat ing system and other files without having to exit the TEN PLUS environment It allows the user to select an operation from a list of options which can be customized by altering the editor profile The procedure for customizing the New Task Menu is described in TEN PLUS Profiles Although the New Task Menu is installation dependent it usually has options for displaying the home directory executing UNIX shell commands running a shell command in a box showing the profiles directory editing the editor profile and displaying the history of the TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 15 current file Options can be added for accessing other files or direc tories running a specific program and displaying the output in a popup box and clearing the screen to run specific programs Most of the menu operations require a series of steps if performed without the use of MENU The cursor positioning functions are used to position the cursor at the desired option Once the desired item is selected use to select the option and perform the indicated operation to remove the menu without executing the selected opera tion or to p
158. e and to move a directory from one location to another and to remove a directory When you remove a directory all files and subdirectories located within that directory are also removed 1 With the cursor on the line describing your quiksell directory use DELETE The message Saving direc tory hierarchy quiksell will appear Both the quiksell directory and the report file contained within it are removed You can use to recover a directory deleted the last time you used but only during the same editing ses sion in which the directory was removed Once you have exited the TEN PLUS environment the buffers that hold deleted files and directories are cleared 2 Use RESTORE to restore the deleted quiksell directory Both the quikse11 directory and the report file within it are restored PICK UP and DELETE can also be used with BOX MARK and ENTER motion to remove multiple directories 5 10 Recovering Directories From putdir The TEN PLUS File Manager maintains a safety back up area where deleted files and directories are stored This safety area allows you to recover files and directories that you have mistakenly deleted The default location is a directory called putdir in 66 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 your home directory Files and directories placed in putdir by the system remain there until you specifically remove them Files and directories placed in putdir are removed whenever you select Housekeep fro
159. e been made to file since its creation The format of a structured file is record oriented For a simple text file these records are the text lines in the file Along with the records is extra information used for inserting lines deleting lines setting the current index specifying start information and storing user comments At the end of the file is information about where the current records are located in the file so that it can be accessed quickly History uses this same extra information to describe the changes made to the records during each editing session SEE ALSO e 1 ghost 1 newfile 1 readfile 1 rmhist 1 versions 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 newfile 1 Base newfile 1 NAME newfile convert a text file into an INed structured file SYNOPSIS newfile text file new file DESCRIPTION Newfile converts an ASCII text file to a structured file If only text file is given the structured file name is taken to be the same and the text file is backed up by appending a bak to the text file name Newfile does a fatal error exit if the text file does not exist or if it can not create the structured file For example newfile document sdoc converts the ASCII text file document into the structured text file sdoc newfile document converts the ASCII file document into a structured text file and saves the ASCII version as document bak SEE ALSO e 1 ghost 1 history 1 readfile 1 rmhi
160. e index file should be synchronized the directory for deleted files and the files that should be hidden 4 1 Creating Your File Manager Profile To create your file manager profile file use HOME profiles indexprf USE and select the option to create a structured file If a profiles directory does not already exist in your home directory one will be created After a brief pause the top level of the index profile will appear on the display Directory Helper Options Synchronize the index file with the directory x Directory for deleted files HOME putdir 4 2 The Top Level of the File Manager Profile The first option in the top level of the file manager profile allows you to specify whether the directory listing will be updated that is synchronized with the actual state of the system whenever you create files through the filename sequence The x in the first field specifies that synchronization will take place this is the default Unless there is an x in this field synchronization will not take place Note that any other character will not cause syn chronization to take place In that case files created through the filename sequence will not show in the directory list ing until you manually list them by selecting Display visible files from the LOCAL MENU The second option specifies the directory in which the system is to place your deleted files and directories The default is HOME putdir You can change this de
161. e numeric keypad Alt a on the keyboard Alt 1 on the keyboard Jg EG E E e mg wl In HE T c m Pg Dn on the numeric keypad z Pg Up on the numeric keypad 36 WINDOW REPLACE un 19 Im ia ix e rmi i Im m e E FEL LE zi ie jc BERRERaE EEEEEEEPEEEEEBE 4 mj HL ic js lt j n e e 4 A x v ASH SBE 2955888985 S E le 2 28 os BE ct 4 gt Ld TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 Ctrl j on the keyboard F2 on the function keypad Alt mon the keyboard F 1 on the function keypad Alt End on the numeric keypad Alt n on the keyboard Alt Pg Dn on the numeric keypad Alt Pg Up on the numeric keypad F7 on the function keypad F5 on the function keypad Alt Home on the numeric keypad Alt Prt Sc to the right of the keyboard F8 on the function keypad F6 on the function keypad CtrlVon the keyboard Alt q on the keyboard Alt z on the keyboard Alt 5 on the numeric keypad Alt Insert below the numeric keypad to the right of the keyboard Alt r on the keyboard Alt s on the keyboard Alt on the numeric keypad Alt on the numeric keypad Alt v on the keyboard l to the left of the keyboard Shift I to the left of the keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 37 Alt t on the keyboard Alt u on the keyboard Alt w on the keyboard F9 on the function keypad F 10 on the function keypad 38 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 8 VT220 and VT240 8 1 The VT220 and VT
162. e of a file you wish to create the instruction box for creating new files appears Use EXECUTE to create the file if it does not yet exist Use NEXT WINDOW to change windows If there are more than two windows moves the cursor from window to window in the order in which the windows were created Use ENTER WINDOW to remove windows All windows except the one in which the cursor currently resides are removed Use this exercise to practice making windows and using alternate files 1 In the report file use ENTER report USE The report file is now the current and alternate file Use ENTER GO TO to move to the end of the current file Use to switch back and forth between the current and alternate files TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 55 4 In either the current or alternate file position the cursor part way down the window then use ENTER report WINDOW to create a horizontal window containing the report file 5 Use NEXT WINDOW to switch back and forth between windows 6 Use PAGE then use NEXT WINDOW Note that different parts of the file are displayed in each window 7 ZOOM OUT of the files Although this exercise used the file report as the alternate and window files you can use USE WINDOW and NEXT WINDOW to access many different files at one time 56 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 5 THE FILE MANAGER The File Manager is the primary utility used to crea
163. e order from the pick buffer and the file is restored to its previous state 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 using DELETE and RESTORE instead of PICK UP and jPUT DOWN Although PICK UP and DELETE are similar in function they store text in different buffers This permits you to PICK UP text for a move and continue editing while making permanent deletions with without disturbing your pick buffer You can then the text at the appropriate location 4 6 Adding Blank Lines and Splitting Lines INSERT inserts a blank line above the cursor line and moves the rest of the lines down INSERT splits the current line at the cursor position and moves the text to the right of the cursor to the next line ENTER number INSERT where number is the 34 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 number of lines inserts the specified number of lines at the cursor position and moves the rest of the lines down Practice adding blank lines and splitting lines 1 With the cursor on the last I on the third line use ENTER INSERT The line is split at the cursor position 2 With the cursor on the fourth line use INSERT A blank line appears at the cursor position and the text on and below the cursor line is moved down one line The cursor is posi tioned on the blank line at the column in which it was located when INSERT was used 3 Position the cursor at the beginning of the blank line and type It is so easy to uSe 4 Position the cur
164. e the characters just typed then type TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 9 1 t t t Preliminary report by Pat As you can see I got the hang of the system right away It s so fast and easy I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past not so reliable either I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can usr larry report INSERT Line 20 20 If you make a typographical error BACKSPACE to correct the error then continue typing If there is an error on a pre vious line ignore it you will learn how to revise it later If you type text to
165. e top row of keys 2 S 10 This is an alternate key sequence 32 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 7 AT amp T PERSONAL COMPUTER 6300 7 1 The AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 Keyboard Figure 6 shows the AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 keyboard lay out and function locations for the TEN PLUS system A INSERT MODE To invoke a function indicated by 5 hold down the Alt key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by 7 hold down the Shift key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by SS hold down the Ctr1 key and touch the designated key at the same time Figure 6 AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System Scroll Lock s BREAK ORKEN LINE 4 or Mte DELET CHARACTER CANCEL EXECUTE ENTER Z z eseajay uoieuuoju pseoghey SNId NIL EE 34 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 7 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 Keyboard Functions are accessed in one of four ways on an AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 l Touch the defined key For example is invoked by touching 5 on the numeric keypad The Num Lock key must not be on Hold down the A1t key then touch the designated key For example is invoked by holding down the A1t key then touching x Hold down the Shift key then touch the designated key For example
166. ea is put down the lines on which the text is inserted open horizontally to make room for the new material the remainder of each line is moved to the right The portion of the screen defined by vertical and horizontal cursor motion includes all of the lines between the initial and the final cur sor positions including the initial and final lines The columns from and including the leftmost position up to but not including the rightmost position are also included Use PAGE PAGE LINE and LINE to indicate argu ments spanning more than one window of text In addition and move the window to define arguments extending beyond the horizontal window of text or can be used after to move the cursor to the beginning or end of the current line respectively and move the window forward or backward one page respec tively and cursor define the lines of text from the beginning cursor position to the ending cursor position This sequence is commonly used to begin defining a block for moving copying inserting or deleting that extends beyond a page boundary An area can be defined in any direction The only requirements are that a group of lines be defined by indicating the first and last line in either direction and that an area of text be defined by indicating two opposite corners in any order 8 2 3 Designating Running Text Regions TEXT MARK used to define a running sequence of text is most often used to delete move or
167. ecified the current year is assumed If only the date is specified the time is set to zero mid night If only the hour and minute are specified the seconds are set to zero Note that the hours are based on a 24 hour clock EXAMPLES ghost oldfile newfile Reconstructs the current version of oldfile as newfile This is useful if oldfile is broken ghost oldfile Reconstructs the current version of oldfile Output is to oldfile and the old file is saved as oldfile bak ghost d oldfile Reconstructs the current version of oldfile Output is to oldfile and the old file is not saved ghost oldfile newfile 7 15 Reconstructs the July 15th version of oldfile as newfile ghost oldfile newfile 7 15 80 15 10 Reconstructs the version of oldfile that existed on July 15th 1980 at 3 10 in the afternoon ghost p oldfile newfile 7 15 80 15 10 Reconstructs the most recent version of oldfile that existed prior to July 15th 1980 at 3 10 in the afternoon ghost oldfile newfile 7 15 80 15 10 45 Specifies the version of oldfile down to the second This is use ful if several changes where made to a file in a very short time SEE ALSO e 1 history 1 newfile 1 readfile 1 rmhist 1 versions 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 history 1 Base history 1 NAME history print the history of an INed structured file SYNOPSIS history file DESCRIPTION History prints a description of the incremental changes that hav
168. ed eight columns apart beginning with the first column n text Tab stops are cleared and set with SET TAB 97 15 This function moves the cursor to the first nonblank charac ter of the next line If the next line is blank the cursor is placed immediately below the first nonblank character in the 12 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 previous line If the cursor is on the last line of the window the window scrolls one line before the cursor moves to the next line This allows text to be entered continuously at the end of a file without having to reposition the window to bring in new blank lines BEGIN LINE END LINE These functions move the cursor to the beginning BEGIN LINE or end END LINE of the current line BEGIN LINE moves the cursor to the first character on the line and END LINE moves the cursor one space to the right of the last character on the line 5 2 Window Positioning Functions There are seven window positioning functions used with the INed editor LINE These functions move text one third of a window forward LINE or backward LINE The cursor remains on the same line unless the line it is on scrolls outside of the window If is used and the cursor line scrolls out side of the window the cursor moves to the top of the win dow If LINE is used and the cursor line scrolls outside of the window the cursor moves to the bottom of the window ENTER LINE moves the window
169. elper is designed for use with the KNR Compiler only 8 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS This section contains both system and editor informa tion The emphasis however is on using UNIX System filters from within the INed editor UNIX System filters used to modify text while using the editor facili tate such functions as global replacing sorting and jus tif ying This section also describes editor facilities such as the help and print menus It concludes with procedures for changing passwords changing the editor profile file and using wildcards APPENDIX TEN PLUS FUNCTIONS This appendix describes the capabilities of each of the TEN PLUS functions and sequences 1 3 Accessing TEN PLUS Functions Accessing TEN PLUS functions requires different keystroke sequences on different keyboards Refer to the appropriate section of TEN PLUS Keyboard Information for an alphabetic listing of the TEN PLUS functions and the keystroke sequences required for your keyboard Note that references to the ENTER key indicate the key labelled RETURN or ENTER on your keyboard References to the TEN PLUS ENTER function ENTER indicate the key labelled ENTER on your TEN PLUS template 4 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 2 GETTING STARTED 2 1 Logging In You should be familiar with the terms prompt file and directory before logging in A prompt is a signal that prints on the display it indicates that the system is ready to receive information A f
170. eplaced Use REPLACE when you wish to substitute the replacement string Practice using by replacing Condos with condos l the beginning of your file 2 Use Condos SEARCH 3 Use condos REPLACE 4 20 Accessing Two or More Files Occasionally it is helpful to view two or more files simultaneously When moving or copying text from one file to another the ability to view both files at once eliminates the need to type the same material twice At other times it is necessary to refer to text in another file for ideas and guidance There are two ways to access multiple files The first permits you to jump between two files viewing each file full display and the second permits you to split the editing window into smaller windows for simultaneous viewing of multiple files Any two files can be used as alternate files You can also use this feature to view two portions of the same file If the alternate files are the same file a change made to one copy is also made to the other Multiple alternate files can be accessed in a single editing session 4 20 1 Viewing an Alternate File To create or view an alternate file 1 Access the first file 2 Use ENTER then type the name of the second file 3 Use to bring the second file onto the screen If the second file does not exist or if you mistyped the name of an existing file the file creation menu will appear on the screen Either select one of the options to create a new file or
171. er each line of input More blank lines may be specified The unspace filter removes all blank lines from the input The tab filter reads the input and replaces all strings of two or more blanks with tabs When argument s are specified they are treated as file names All strings of two or more blanks are replaced by tabs This filter is especially useful for TEN PLUS users who edit with the TEN PLUS editor which replaces tabs with spaces because utilities such as make require tabs The untab filter performs the opposite operation It replaces all tabs with strings of blanks Tabs are assumed to occur every 8 spaces TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 ghost 1 Base ghost 1 ghost reconstruct previous versions of an INed structured file SYNOPSIS ghost d p oldname newname m d y h mEs1 1 1 DESCRIPTION Ghost reads the INed structured file oldname and reconstructs a previ ous version of it in the output file newname If only one argument oldname is given the output file newname is taken to be the same and the old file is backed up as oldname bak If the p option is specified ghost reconstructs the most recent version prior to the time specified If the d option is specified a bak file is not created The optional m d y h m s arguments specify a date and time threshold for the reconstruction The default is the current date and time If only the month and day are sp
172. er in the file sth Mailbox FNAME contains NRECS messages Message RNUM From From Message Message The criteria file contains expressions in the following form criterion pattern is in PATH pattern is not in PATH PATH gt number PATH lt number PATH number PATH gt number PATH lt number criteria criterion criteria criteria and criterion criteria or criterion where pattern is a string that can be compiled by regex 3 for exam ple Frank 2 84 or 6 9 0 9 4 PATH is the TEN PLUS path to the node to be checked for the value and number is a float for exam ple 35 or 98 6 A sample criteria file might contain California is in Address State or Nevada is in Address State and Peter is in Name or Paul is in Name or Mary is in Name and Earnings gt 40 000 The above example would print all records that have Peter Paul or Mary in the Name field California or Nevada in the State field and have an amount in the Earnings field greater than 40 000 The format file may contain the criteria information on special control lines Lines beginning with c designate a criteria line If the c option is used on the command line it overrides the criteria in the specfile TEN PLUS User Interface 3 Release 2 2 v prtty 1 Base prtty 1 NAME prtty print to printer port of terminal SYNOPSIS prtty 1 number 1 file DESCRIP
173. ers are provided in your user s manual There are three methods of communicating with the system while in the TEN PLUS environment The first two involve the use of MENU and have been discussed in 85 12 1 and 5 12 2 The third involves the use of ENTER 8 2 1 Running System Commands The procedure for running a command using ENTER is 1 Use ENTER The cursor moves into a popup box containing the ENTER prompt 2 Type the command a 3 Use DO or MENU DO causes the output of the command to print at the cursor position replacing the text from the cur sor position to the next blank line MENU causes the output to print in the popup box 98 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 The output for the command is displayed in the file or the popup box depending on which function is used If is used and there is no specific output for the command for example if the cp 1 command is used to copy a file a popup box with the mes sage No output from command will display on the screen Use CANCEL to remove the popup box 1 Use ENTER date MENU to run the date 1 command and display the results in a popup box Preliminary report by Pat tes Mar 11 19 47 32 PST 1958 4 designs for QuikSell as you requested John es the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have
174. erting structured files to ASCII It should be noted that structured files may grow much larger than the corresponding ASCII files over a lifetime of changes to the files However it is less time consuming to save structured files You can use the History Display only with structured files therefore you should use structured files whenever you wish to maintain a history of changes made to a file 6 2 Creating a Structured File You must first create and modify a structured file to use the History Display 1 ZOOM IN to the quikse11 directory then type a file name and descriptive information TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 83 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description report First Report on the QuikSell Project sample Sample Flyer for QuikSell usr larry quiksell INSERT Line 2 ZOOM IN on the line containing the new file name INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description report First Report on the QuikSell Project sample Sample Flyer for QuikSell You are attempting to create file usr larry quiksell sample Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Create an ASCII file without history Create a structured file with history Create a directory Re enter the fi
175. es 3 File Manager functions 3 File Manager using 3 file moving 7 file moving to beginning of 23 file renaming 7 file restoring 7 file saving 5 17 file structured 4 filetypes 4 file versions accessing 10 file versions saving 10 files editing several 16 files hidden 9 filter 31 filter arguments 31 filter canceling 14 31 33 filter cat 34 filter date 34 filter sort 34 filter tee 34 FONT 33 font alternate 33 font current 33 font default alternate 33 font default current 33 font selection 33 font values 33 fonts switching 33 FORMAT 25 32 format operations undoing 32 FORMAT undoing 32 formatting text 32 function definition of 18 FUNCTIONS 25 functions cursor positioning 11 functions File Manager 3 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 functions History Display 4 functions summary 37 functions text editing 18 functions text processing 31 33 functions window positioning 12 ghost 43 GO TO 13 22 23 ZN graphics characters 45 graphics font 24 45 HELP 14 Help Menu 14 hidden files 9 history 35 43 History Display 35 History Display accessing 10 History Display capabilities 3 History Display form 10 History Display functions 4 History Display using 3 history removing 35 history structured file 4 HOME 11 HOME multiple windows and 11 Housekeep 35 INed features 2 INed initializing 4 INed running 4 INed using 2 information boxes u
176. es the incorrectly typed character at the cursor position Use INSERT MODE to switch into overwrite mode This causes the word INSERT to be replaced by the word OVERWRITE below the window Use INSERT MODE to alternate between insert mode and overwrite mode Delete extra characters by using DELETE CHARACTER Use ENTER DELETE CHARACTER to delete text from the cursor position to the end of a line 1 Switch into overwrite mode by using INSERT MODE Note that OVERWRITE replaces INSERT below the window 2 Position the cursor at the period after the word past on the fifth line use to move the cursor three columns to the right and type including the transposition in thnigs I can already tell that this system is going to speed thnigs up immensely on my part 3 Position the cursor at the i in is on the fifth line and type will Note that each character typed overwrites the charac ter at the cursor position 4 Use DELETE CHARACTER to delete the extra characters at the end of going oing and the word to 5 Position the cursor at the n in thnigs and type in 6 On the sixth line position the cursor at the space after immensely and type a period 7 Use ENTER DELETE CHARACTER to delete the end of the line 8 Press the ENTER key then use INSERT The screen should now look like this 30 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Preliminary report by Pat As you can see I got the hang of the sys
177. ey For example FORMAT is invoked by touching F3 on the function keypad Hold down the A1t key then touch the designated key For example BOX MARK is invoked by holding down Alt then touching the b key Hold down the Shift key then touch the designated key For example is invoked by holding down Shift then touching the TAB key Hold down the Ctr1 key then touch the designated key For example LINE FEED is invoked by holding down Ctr1 then touching j To log out from the system level hold down the Ctrl key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes m Shift F1 on the function keypad Q Shift F2 on the function keypad 3 Shift F3 on the function keypad 4 Shift F4 on the function keypad 6 Shift F5 on the function keypad 6 Shift F6 on the function keypad Shift F7 on the function keypad Shift F8 on the function keypad t on the numeric keypad 1 on the numeric keypad on the numeric keypad on the numeric keypad BACKSPACE to the top and right on the main keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 11 Alt 4 on the numeric keypad Alt b on the keyboard Ctrl Scroll Lock at the top of the numeric keypad to the right of the numeric keypad Alt c on the keyboard Alt Del on the numeric keypad Del on the numeric keypad Alt x on the keyboard Alt 6 on the numeric keypad to the right of the numeric keypad to the right of the numeric keypad Alt
178. eyboard s 3 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the AT Keyboard VT100 4 1 The VT100 Keyboard ss 4 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the VT100 Keyboard a IBM 3101 1X AND IBM 3101 2X 5 1 The IBM 3101 Keyboards 5 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the IBM 3101 Keyboards ESPRIT ESP 6310 6 1 The Esprit ESP 6310 Keyboard AT 6 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the Esprit ESP 6310 Keyboard AT amp T PERSONAL COMPUTER 6300 7 1 The AT amp T Personal ee 6300 Keyboard 7 2 TEN PLUS Functions on i the AT amp T Personal Computer 6300 Keyboard n VT220 and VT240 8 1 The VT220 and VT240 Keyboards 8 2 TEN PLUS Functions on VT220 and VT240 Keyboards os as re cui ve AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 9 The AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 Keyboards i ord 9 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 Keyboards 32 34 38 38 40 44 44 46 Appendix TERMINAL DESCRIPTION FILES li 51 f TEN PLUS Keyboard Information 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Overview of This Document Functions in the TEN PLUS environment are invoked through func tion keys or special key sequences Different key sequences are required to invoke TEN PLUS functions on different keyboards This document shows the keyboard layout and function locations for various keyboards supported by the TEN PLUS system and explains how to invoke TEN PLUS functions on each It is only necessary to read the section that describes your particular
179. eyboard 0 on the numeric keypad ZOOM OUT on the numeric keypad 19 20 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 5 IBM 3101 1X AND IBM 3101 2X 5 1 The IBM 3101 Keyboards Figure 4 shows the IBM 3101 1x keyboard layout and function i locations for the TEN PLUS system and notes the differences for the IBM 3101 2x keyboard To invoke a function indicated by 7 hold down the ALT key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by K touch and release the ESC key then touch the designated key Zz eseajay uoneunoju pseoghey SNTd NIL An asterisk is used to indicate the location of a function on an IBM 3101 2x keyboard if different from the location on an IBM 3101 1x keyboard Figure 4 IBM 3101 1x Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System LZ 22 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 5 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the IBM 3101 Keyboards Functions are accessed in one of three ways on an IBM 3101 1 Touch the defined key For example PICK UP is invoked by touching ERASE EOL EOF 2 Hold down the ALT key then touch the defined key For example is invoked by holding down ALT while touching a 3 Touch the ESC key release then touch the defined key For example is invoked by touching ESC releasing it then touching q To log out from the system level hold down the ALT key while simultaneously touching d Functio
180. fault by replacing it with a new directory name For example you might decide to place TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 15 deleted files and directories in a directory called removed in your home directory To do this type the path name HOME removed over the existing path name in this option The third option specifies files to be hidden By default all files beginning with a dot or ending in bak old or index will be hidden The asterisk you see in the display is used as a wild card which means that it is equivalent to any character or characters Files ending in bak are created by the system each time you complete an editing session on an ASCII file The previous version of each of these files is saved under a new name created by truncating the file name as necessary and appending bak Any previous bak file is overwritten A index file is a structured file created and used by the File Manager to edit a directory You cannot access a index file directly You can specify which files are to be hidden in your directory listing by modifying the list of file names contained in this option How ever you can always see a listing of all files by using LOCAL MENU and choosing option 2 Display a11 files TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 SALTFILE 4 bak file 15 gt CANCEL 12 command pipeline 4 commands print profile 11 deleted files and directories storing 14 directory listing synchronizing 14 editor
181. file up 4 7 Joining Lines Sometimes it is necessary to join two adjacent lines This can be done with FORMAT but fills all lines in the paragraph to the current margins Use or ENTER in situations where specific lines are to be joined and the rest of the text should not be filled as in a list l Position the cursor at the end of the fifth line two spaces after the e in use 2 Use ENTER PICK UP The line is joined with the line below Preliminary report by Pat As you can see so far things are going well I got the hang of the system in just a few short hours It is so easy to use I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past I can already tell that this system will speed things up immensely I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more
182. ft hand margin is restored to its original position 3 2 Changing the Right Hand Margin for Word Wrap The right hand margin controls the point at which text begins to wrap onto the next line Word wrap increases typing speed by elim inating the need to press the ENTER key at the end of every line When a file is created the right hand margin is automatically set The setting is indicated by the placement of the letter r on the tab grid above the window Note the position of the default right hand margin setting above the window on your display The right hand margin can be removed or changed to any column between columns 2 and 200 The cursor must however be some where within the window All text entered after the margin is changed wraps at the new right hand margin Having no right hand margin set turns off word wrap Note that to set a right hand mar gin a left hand margin must already be set To create a new right hand margin 1 Move the cursor to the column at which the new right hand margin is to be set The line on which the cursor is located when the margin is set does not affect the setting The new margin affects text typed after the margin is changed regard less of where the text is typed 18 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 2 Use MARGIN Note that the position of the r on the tab grid above the window changes Practice changing the right hand margin in the report file l to the eighth tab stop and use MARGIN
183. g as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks usr larry report INSERT Line 3 5 Reset both margins so that they are each indented approxi mately two inches 6 Move the cursor to the third line of the next paragraph in the file then use FORMAT Note that the lines above the cursor are not affected TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 21 7 Reset the margins to the default columns and use FORMAT to reformat the text including the paragraphs at the end of the file 8 Where necessary adjust the first line in each paragraph by positioning the cursor on the first character in the line and using to move the line to the left hand margin use again 3 5 Centering Text CENTER centers a single line of text between the current left and right hand margins To center a single line 1 Position the cursor on the line to be centered 2 Use CENTER To center multiple lines cursor define the lines to be centered before using CENTER 1 Move the cursor to the first line to be centered then use E
184. ged it prints a message in a popup box To specify the files to be watched ZOOM IN to the Files the Editor Should Watch option at the top level of your editor profile Files the Editor Should Watch Name of file Message to display Program to run HOME reminder SYS bin showrem d The first field Name of file should contain the name of the file the editor is to watch This file name can contain shell variables 2 3 The second field Message to display should contain the message the editor will display when the file changes The third field Program to run should contain the name of the program to run when the file changes An entry must be made in the Name of file field and at least one of the other fields If there is an entry in the Message to display field and not in the Program to run field the indi cated message appears in a popup box when the editor notices that the file has changed If there is an entry in the Program to run field and not in the Message to display field the editor runs the indicated program and prints the output from the program in a popup box If there is an entry in both fields first the indicated 8 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 message appears in a popup box then the editor runs the indicated program When the program completes the original popup box disappears and the output from the program appears in a new popup box Here is a sample watch files screen with two sample entries
185. graph unless otherwise specified When searching for and replacing a string of words that contains a space or spaces enclose the string in quotation marks to hold the words together for example 1931 cpl XXX Corporation YYY Company DO Note that the number 193 is followed by the letter 1 to indicate the number of lines to be affected To identify one form of a word to be replaced without replacing variations put a space before and or after the word For example ENTER 20 rpl tree shrub DO This example ensures that tree is replaced but not trees To initiate a global replacement use nl rpl target string replacement string DO where target string is the original string being searched for and replacement string is the string that is to replace the target string The argument n without 1 is the specific number of paragraphs and n1 is the specific number of lines To use the global search and replace command 1 Determine the area where the word or string is to be replaced If n is not specified the replacement is made within the para graph where the cursor is positioned To modify the default specify the number of paragraphs n or lines n1 from the cursor position in which the replacement should be made For example to replace all occurrences of a particular string throughout a document a Use ENTER GO TO to go to the end of the report file TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 101 b Note the nu
186. hand margin The simplest way to set a new left hand margin is to use MARGIN 1 Move the cursor across the display to the column at which the new left hand maryin is to be set The line on which the cur sor is located does not affect the setting The new margin affects text typed after the margin is changed regardless of where the text is typed 16 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 2 Use MARGIN The position of the 1 on the tab grid above the window will change To move the left hand margin back to the left hand edge of the window 1 Use or to position the cursor at the left hand border 2 Use MARGIN Practice changing the left hand margin on the report file Use to move to the end of the file 2 to the first tab stop and use MARGIN 3 Add an indented paragraph to the end of your file I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more m business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can 1ife should be so goodl This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we
187. he word INSERT on the bottom line of the screen indicates that insert mode is in effect On the other hand new text replaces existing text as you type when overwrite mode is in effect The word OVERWRITE replaces the word INSERT on the bottom line of the screen You can switch between insert and overwrite modes with INSERT MODE If you are in insert mode INSERT MODE places you in overwrite mode conversely if you are in overwrite mode INSERT MODE places you in insert mode w INSERT MODE is independent of INSERT INSERT MODE is used to switch between insert and overwrite modes while INSERT is used to insert blank lines in a file or directory Using SEARCH SEARCH and BREAK On occasion you may want to quickly locate a word or phrase in a file To search for a word or phrase starting at the current cursor position and continuing to the end of the file use ENTER type the word or phrase you wish to find then use YSEARCH The system searches for an exact character match For example a search for the word sales will find sales but not Sales because the small s and the capital S are different characters If there is no matching word or phrase a message will appear in a popup box If the search is successful the cursor will be positioned on the match ing word or phrase You can then search for the next occurrence of the same word or phrase by simply using SEARCH again You can also search backward t
188. he cursor at the new location and use or PUT DOWN To copy words sentences multi ple lines or paragraphs use or to cursor define the area before using PICK COPY If multiple copies of the text are needed position the cursor where the picked text is to be placed and use PUT COPY The picked text can be copied into the file as many times as needed it stays at the top of the pick buffer until you 1 Use PICK UP or jPICK COPY to place new text at the top of the pick buffer 2 Use PUT DOWN thereby removing it from the pick buffer Practice using PICK COPY and PUT COPY to duplicate sentences and paragraphs Position the cursor at the W in We on line 47 then use BOX MARK 2 Use to move the cursor six lines down to the J in J Winkler then use PICK COPY The lines are stored in the pick buffer 3 Position the cursor at the beginning of line 39 then use PUT COPY The lines are copied from the pick buffer into the file 46 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 I read it all and it looks ok to me Are we going to get together in the next few days to discuss all this Pat s ideas on the campaign seemed a bit odd to me We should meet with the following people before the end of the week Adams Larson Pantages Sternig Winkler Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it Seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I 11 begin
189. he display the cursor moves to the right hand border if is used or to the left hand border if is used and can also be used in conjunction with to indicate a specific number of columns for the window to move n moves the window n columns to the left and n moves the cursor n columns to the right 7 17 Inserting Control Characters QUOTE Control characters are nonprinting characters some of which per form formatting functions in text files allows the insertion of control characters into text To insert control characters into a file use QUOTE then type the printing character that corresponds to the desired control character For example to insert a Ctrl a at the cursor position use a Some control characters are displayed as special graphics characters To enter several control characters use the graphics font 88 11 b TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 25 7 18 Redrawing the Display REFRESH REFRESH erases then redraws the display This is useful when a system message appears on the screen during an editing session 7 19 Deleting and Restoring DELETE and RESTORE File Organizing lines in a file typically involves moving copying and deleting operations The first two are managed with PICK UP PICK UP PUT DOWN PICK COPY and PUT COPY Deletion is handled with DELETE Lines deleted with are added to the wastebasket buffer Deleted lines in the wastebasket buffer can be restored with RESTORE
190. hrough the file starting at the current cursor position and continuing to the beginning of the file To search backward use SEARCH instead of SEARCH You can interrupt a search operation by using BREAK For exam ple if you discover after using either SEARCH or SEARCH that you made an error while typing the word or phrase to be found you can use BREAK to stop the search operation 24 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 Using USE As you have seen you can move through the directory structure to a specific file by using ZOOM OUT and ZOOM IN as appropriate Because you are able to see the directory and file names at the vari ous directory levels you do not need to remember the full name of a file in order to access it You can however use another method to e a specific file directly if you know its exact name Use E type the name of the desired file in the popup box and use USE S SE brings the desired file onto the screen At this point you have established what is known as an alternate file Now every time you use USE the system will alternately display the original file and the alternate file To directly access another file or to establish a new alternate file simply use ENTER type the name of the new alternate file and use USE Once you have established an alternate file you may move text between the original file and the alternate file by using or in one file then USE and then or i
191. i liar with the numbers that correspond to the choices on that menu corresponds to the File Manager option 3 Return to normal directory display therefore you can use to return to the File Manager display 9 Use LOCAL MENU option 3 Return to normal directory display to return to the File Manager display To change permissions or other options on a single file you can use option 5 Show more details about this file from the normal directory display to see the Detailed File Status Information display In large directories this is much faster than displaying status information for all files 5 12 New Task Menu Options You have already used to move from another directory to your home directory This option is always available to you no matter where you are located in the directory structure There are several other options also available to you through MENU 1 Use MENU to see the New Task Menu INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar New Task Menu Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Show home directory Execute UNIX shell commands Run a shell command in a box Show your profiles directory Edit your editor profile Housekeep Display history of current file usr larry INSERT Line 76 TEN PLUS Tutorial
192. icating Lines or Areas PICK COPY 7 8 Placing Text in a File PUT COPY and PUT DOWN 7 9 Searching for a Text String SEARCH and SEARCH NE T eo Canceling a Search BREAK RE Searching and Replacing REPLACE Moving to a Specified Line GO TO Creating More Than One Window WINDOW Changing Windows NEXT WINDOW Setting and Clearing Tabs SET TAB Editing Wide Lines RIGHT and LEFT Inserting Control Characters QUOTE Redrawing the Display REFRESH Deleting and Restoring DELETE and RESTORE Fil RA MIA dT we 3 7 20 Using FUNCTIONS A SNN MP MP eben So 00 120 Cn 4 C2 t2 COD ARGUMENTS TO FUNCTIONS 8 1 Typed Arguments 8 2 Cursor Defined Arguments fi r 8 2 1 Designating Lines 8 2 2 Designating Blocks 8 2 3 Designating Running Text Regions 9 TEXT PROCESSING FUNCTIONS 9 1 Using Arguments ENTER cei DO 9 2 Replacing Strings rpl 9 3 Formatting Tex FORMAT 9 4 Setting Margins MARGIN 9 5 Centering Tex CENTER 9 6 Selecting Fonts FONT 9 7 Canceling a Filter Operation BREAK 9 8 More DO Capabilities tee cat sort and date 10 RECOVERY 10 1 Old Versions of ASCII Piles 10 2 Old Versions of Structured Files 10 3 Automatic Recovery 11 MISCELLANEA 11 1 Text File Format 11 2 TEN PLUS Limitations 11 3 The Editor Profile Appendix A SUMMARY OF TEN PLUS FUNCTIONS FILES Appendix C BOX CHARACTER SET Appendix D ERROR MESSAGES
193. ice ID N A File Manager Ownership Owner of t Group of t Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Permissions Owner rw Set Uid Display visible files Display all files 3 Return to normal directory display 4 Show details about files Pile Time of la Show more details about this file Access Time of la ZOOMOUT Show details about files Times Time of la Show more details about this file usr larry OVERWRITE Line 1 1 7 Select 4 Show details about files or ZOOMOUT Show details about files You will again be viewing the file status information display To deny access to all of the files in a particular directory you can change the permissions on the directory itself For exam ple if users in your group do not have read permission on your quiksell directory they cannot view the files in that direc tory even if they have read permission on a particular file 8 Change the permissions on your quikse11 directory so that other users do not have read or execute permission on it INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS System To see detailed file status information select an item and ZOOM IN File Name T Owner Size Modification Date Permissions 1988 cal mesg phone policies quiksell report usr larry OVERWRITE Line TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 75 You can bypass once you have become fam
194. ifiers is a field name surrounded by either square brackets and or curly brackets and When the prtsf program sees a field specifier it looks to see if the current record contains a field of the given name and substitutes the field value for the field specifier in the output If the record does not have the specified field a null string is used for the substitution If square brackets are used to delimit the field specifier the text is padded with spaces or truncated to the same length as the field specifier including the brackets If curly brackets are used the entire field value is substituted For example name name age age title title has two fixed width fields name with a width of 6 and title with a width of 11 and one variable width field age It is possible to use relative TEN PLUS path names instead of simple field names This can be used to display multiple lines from a field For example message 0 message 1 message 2 message 3 message 4 would put the first five lines of the message field into the five fields in the form or blanks of that width if there are fewer than five lines If a simple field name is used such as message without the line specifier and the field has multiple lines only the first line will be substituted These path names can be arbitrarily complex and can include index numbers which start at zero names and asterisks TEN PLUS Use
195. ile is a collection of data records stored on the computer For example a file might contain a phone list a letter or a report A directory is a collection of files For example all files related to a given topic might be located in the same directory Directories are explained in detail in 5 These terms are used frequently throughout this tutorial Additional examples are provided later in the text The system prompts for user identification before granting access Although the prompt can be personalized from system to system it usually asks for a user name and a password To log in 1 Type your user name and press the ENTER key The infor mation is sent to the computer when the ENTER key is used 2 The system may prompt for a password private security identification after a user name is received If a password has been issued and the password prompt displays type the password and press the key For security purposes the password does not appear on the display when typed If a password has not been issued and the password prompt displays press the key to complete the login procedure If your system administrator has arranged for you to automatically log in to the TEN PLUS environment a formatted screen listing the name and description of each of your files and directories will appear This listing is called your home directory This screen is an example of a home directory TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2
196. ils about menus and popup boxes Use whenever you are uncertain about what to do Either a popup box with additional instructions or a menu of options will appear on your screen allows you to remove menus and popup boxes from your screen For example if you decide that you do not want to create a new file use CANCEL when the file creation menu appears This causes the menu to be removed from the screen To see how and work to the status file and then again The message Cannot zoom in any further appears in a popup box Use HELP The error message is explained in more detail in another popup box Use CANCEL to remove the popup boxes TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 9 CREATING DIRECTORIES You can create directories using the same procedure that you used to create new files Create a directory called practice in your home directory Type practice in the File field of your home directory then to the Description field and type Practice Files Directory INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description status Current Sales Status practice Practice Files Directory usr larry INSERT Now ZOOM IN The file creation menu appears Select the option to create a directory After a brief pause a blank directory screen appears INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description usr larry pr
197. in a new file name The current version of the file with all of its history will be placed in ile bak and the version of the file you are looking at will become the current version All other TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 89 history will be removed See rmhist 1 for more information about removing history from a file 5 Use ZOOM OUT to return to the History of file form then ZOOM OUT again to return to your original file 6 4 Removing History As noted previously a structured file may grow quite large over a lifetime of changes In order to save disk space it s a good idea to remove the history from a structured file when the history is no longer needed You can copy your files to diskette or tape before removing history if you wish Your New Task Menu provides a convenient way to remove the history from all structured files in your home directory and all of its subdirectories l In your sample file use MENU Many Fortune 1000 companies have already discovered that QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY ge M 71 nt and accurate New Task Menu Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Show home directory Execute UNIX shell commands Run a shell command in a box Show your profiles directory Edit your editor profile Housekeep Display history of current file
198. in keyboard above the right keypad or 8 on the right keypad H HB BE i ej EJ E above the right keypad or 2 on the right keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 47 above the right keypad or 4 on the right keypad above the right keypad or 1 B S Ie E b al a m 6 on the right keypad BACKSPACE on the keyboard ESC then 4 on the right keypad MARK CTRL b on the keyboard BREAK BREAK on the keyboard on the right keypad ESC then c on the keyboard DELETE on the main keyboard on the right keypad ESC then x on the keyboard p END LINE ESC then 6 on the right keypad ENTER ENTER on the right keypad ENTER on the right keypad ESC then d on the keyboard ESC then on the keyboard F3 on the function keypad ESC then h on the keyboard GO TO 1 on the right keypad 5 on the right keypad IET J7 B 7 on the right keypad 11 Do not confuse this key with DEL CHAR on the left keypad 12 Do not confuse this key with HOME on the left keypad 48 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 F4 on the function keypad 0 on the right keypad ESC then a on the keyboard ESC then 1 on the keyboard LINE 3 on the right keypad LINE 9 on the right keypad LINE FEED LINE FEED on the keyboard AL MENU F2 on the function keypad ESC then m on the keyboard F 1 on the function keypad ESC then 1 on the right keypad WINDOW ESC then n on the keyboard PAGE ESC then 3 on the right keypa
199. ines or block defined by cursor and put it in buffer Or ZZ se j y jenueyy eoueJejeu SNId NIL Nu NY FUNCTION Action of FUNCTION Action of ENTER FUNCTION PREVIOUS ERROR Display the previous item in a list Action of ENTER X FUNCTION X is any argument Action of ENTER motion FUNCTION motion is a combination of cursor positioning functions PRINT Display the menu of print options ERROR PUT COPY Place newest contents of buffer at ERROR cursor position Note 4 PUT DOWN Move newest contents from buffer ERROR to cursor position Note 4 QUIT Terminate editing session after attempting to save files Terminate editing session after attempt ing to save files X is positive Display the Xth item in a ERROR list ERROR ERROR X is positive Place X copies of buffer ERROR contents at cursor location X is positive Place X copies of buffer ERROR contents at cursor position Terminate editing session after attempt ing to save files Terminate editing session after attempting to save files QUOTE Translate the next typed character ERROR into its CRTL key equivalent ERROR REFRESH Redraw display Redraw display Redraw display Redraw display REPLACE Replace the search string with the replace string Set the replace string to null If cursor is a
200. ing functions to pick up a text region then tried to put the text down in a field that has a tree data path a list field Fields with tree data paths cannot accept text regions Action To move data from a field with a text data path to a field with a tree data path use the pick and put opera tions alone or in conjunction with and the horizontal and or vertical cursor positioning func tions You cannot put type data in this field Cause You have used PICK UP PICK COPY or to pick data from one type of field such as a field with a tree data path then tried to put it into another type of field such as a field with a text data path or another type of tree data path The data that you have picked can only be put into a field having the same structure Action To pick text from any field use the pick and put operations with BOX MARK and the horizontal and or vertical cursor positioning functions Text picked up in this way can be put into any type of field You cannot set the left margin to the right of the right margin Cause You have tried to set the left margin to the right of the right margin this is not allowed Action To set the left margin move the cursor to a position to the left of the right margin and use MARGIN You cannot set the right margin to the left of the left margin Cause You have tried to set the right margin to the left of the left margin This is not allowed TEN PLUS Reference
201. ion Release 2 2 on the numeric keypad Ctrl n on the keyboard Next Screen to the left of the numeric keypad 4 Prev Screen to the left of the numeric keypad F 19 above the keyboard F 17 above the keyboard on the numeric keypad F 12 above the keyboard F20 above the keyboard F 18 above the keyboard Ctrl on the keyboard Shift F9 above the keyboard Ctrl r on the keyboard F 13 above the keyboard PF2 above the numeric keypad Return on the right of the keyboard F8 above the keyboard Shift F10 above the keyboard Find to the left of the numeric keypad F6 above the keyboard Ctrl v on the keyboard Tab on the left of the keyboard Shift F6 above the keyboard Ctr1 t on the keyboard F 14 above the keyboard Ctrl w on the keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 0 on the numeric keypad ZOOM OUT on the numeric keypad 43 44 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 9 AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 9 1 The AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 Keyboards Figure 8 shows the AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 keyboard layout and function locations for the TEN PLUS system m To invoke TEN PLUS functions on the left keypad the left keypad must be in Alternate Keypad mode To invoke a function indicated by ES hold down the CTRL key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by then touch the designated key To invoke a function indicated b
202. iption of it The Value field contains the terminal code that produces the desired action as defined in the technical manual for the specific terminal or TRUE FALSE if the capability has a boolean value The following are sample output sequences from the VT100 terminal description Name Meaning Value al Str insert line E L bs Bool terminal can backspace with h TRUE ee Bool enter execute TRUE k0 Str DEL character kl Str QUIT character The first entry indicates the terminal code that causes a new line to be inserted the second entry indicates that the terminal can backspace using CTRL h the third entry indicates that enter and execute are mapped to the same key the fourth entry indicates that the DEL char acter is CTRL and the fifth entry indicates that the QUIT character is the default as determined by the environment The Value field is interpreted as follows For boolean fields the first character is examined If it is T or t the value is taken to be true Otherwise it is taken to be false For string fields the defaults are changed only if a new value is explicitly specified Following is a list of the escape sequences used by the editor Name Meaning al Str Insert line am Bool automatic margins i e cursor wraps at EOL bc Str backspace character bs Bool terminal can backspace with h bw Bool backspace wraps to nd of cur lin ce Str kill to eol cl Str clear screen cm Str cursor motion
203. is invoked by holding down the Shift key then touching l Hold down the Ctr1 key then touch the designated key For example LINE FEED is invoked by holding down the Ctr1 key then touching j To log out from the system level hold down the Ctr1 key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes m Alt F1 on the function keypad 2 Alt F2 on the function keypad Alt F3 on the function keypad Alt F4 on the function keypad Alt F5 on the function keypad Alt F6 on the function keypad Alt F7 on the function keypad Alt F8 on the function keypad on the numeric keypad on the numeric keypad on the numeric keypad umessssmssmssmss on the numeric keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 35 to the right of and and at the top of the keyboard Alt on the numeric keypad Alt b on the keyboard sg m 28 n ale E Wis xm Alia E BREAK Scroll Lock in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard to the right of the numeric keypad Alt c on the keyboard Alt Delete below the numeric keypad Delete below the numeric keypad Alt x on the keyboard Alt on the numeric keypad to the right of the numeric keypad to the right of the numeric keypad Alt d on the keyboard Alt f on the keyboard F3 on the function keypad Alt h on the keyboard ane 3 d End on the numeric keypad 5 on the numeric keypad Home on the numeric keypad F4 on the function keypad Insert below th
204. is redirected to the specified file If the first column contains a UNIX System command the specified com mand is executed If the Command field is left blank the Print Helper prompts for a UNIX command If a file or program name is not entered after a pipe or redirect symbol the Print Helper prompts for the missing information The output instructions entered in the Command field can contain shell variables and user prompts Shell variables are denoted by typing a dollar sign followed by the variable name The Print Helper understands all editor environment variable names and two additional variable names that are specific to the Print Helper PRTCMD the expanded command used only in the Descrip tion for popbox PRTFILE the name of the temporary print output file useful in shell commands User prompts are strings of underlined characters When the editor processes a command with a prompt it displays the prompt in a popup box The editor replaces the prompt with whatever the user types into the box before executing the command If the command is not entered in full the editor prompts for the command input 12 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 required CANCEL can be used to remove the popup box and can cel the operation of the command The first command in the default print profile displayed above pipes the output through print 1 and the title on the header page is set to the name of the file currently being edited
205. itioning Functions The cursor positioning functions move the cursor on the screen In addition to discussed in a previous subsection the most frequently used cursor positioning functions are I 1 7 and they move the cursor down up right and left respectively You can also vae RACKSPACE to move the cursor to the left but unlike BACKSPACE erases characters as it moves BACKSPACE is used to correct typing errors moves the cursor to the next tab stop on the right while moves the cursor to the previous tab stop on the left On most terminals the cursor positioning functions repeat automati cally Holding down the key s for any of these functions will result in continuous cursor motion until the keys are released You can use the cursor positioning functions to place the cursor anywhere on the screen including on any previously typed character as well as on the borders of any field If you place the cursor on such a border and attempt to type there you ll get an error indication usu ally a beep TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 5 CREATING DOCUMENTS You can create documents also called files in any of your direc tories including your home directory Suppose you want to create a file called status with the description Current Sales Status and that you want this file to be in your home directory To create the file move the cursor to the first blank line on your home directory screen Type the
206. itor profile HOME profiles editorprf personal editor profile HOME estate records editor state from invocation to invocation Hamxxxxxxxx temporary dots file for editing ASCII file name name bak backup copy of ASCII file name usr bin e or usr bin te editor usr lib INed termcap terms bin standard terminal description file if used SEE ALSO ghost 1 history 1 newfile 1 readfile 1 rmhist 1 tdigest 1 versions 1 ined 4 TEN PLUS Reference Manual TEN PLUS User Interface 2 Release 2 2 fc 1 fc 1 NAME fc compile TEN PLUS forms SYNOPSIS fc formfile DESCRIPTION Fc compiles one or more frm files into the corresponding ofm files For example the file phone frm is compiled into phone ofm A frm file is a structured TEN PLUS file containing a description of a form to be used to view files containing a certain type of data In the case of the example above a form for phone data is being compiled The ofm file contains a digested version of the form file that can easily be read by the TEN PLUS editor Multiple frm files can be compiled by listing them as arguments on the command line The same functionality is available from the TEN PLUS forms helper FILES frm form source file ofm compiled form file SEE ALSO e 1 BUGS A fatal error compiling any form causes fc to stop It should go on to the next form file TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 ffill 1
207. keyboard This document is intended as a supplement to other TEN PLUS documents It is essential that you keep it handy while reading the TEN PLUS Tutorial and the TEN PLUS Reference Manual in this guide 2 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 2 Enhanced AT 2 1 The Enhanced AT Keyboard Figure 1 shows the Enhanced AT keyboard layout and function locations for the TEN PLUS system The same keyboard layout can be used when the TEN PLUS system is invoked using the INTERACTIVE xpctern utility To invoke a function indicated by __ hold down the Alt key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by 4 hold down the Shift key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by C7 hold down the Ctrl key and touch the designated key at the same time Figure 1 Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System Ze eseejeu uogeunuoju pseoghay SNTd NIL 4 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 2 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the Enhanced AT Keyboard Functions are accessed in one of five ways on the Enhanced AT keyboard l Touch the defined key For example is invoked by touching F3 on the top row of keys Hold down the A1t key then touch the designated key For example BOX MARK is invoked by holding down Alt then touching the b key Hold down the Shift key then touch the designated key For example
208. le from your home direc tory to your new quikse11 directory TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 63 1 With the cursor on the line describing the report file use PICK UP 2 Move the cursor to the line describing the quiksell direc tory then ZOOM IN 3 Use PUT DOWN to complete the move You can also move multiple files between directories by using BOX MARK or ENTER motion with PICK UP and PUT DOWN 5 7 Copying Files Between Directories Use PICK COPY and PUT DOWN to make a copy of the report file and place it in your home directory 1 With the cursor on the line describing the report file use PICK COPY 2 ZOOM OUT to your home directory and use PUT DOWN You now have a copy of the report file in both your home directory and your quikse11 directory You can also copy multiple files between directories by using BOX MARK or ENTER motion with PICK COPY and PUT DOWN Note that the system does not ask you to type a new file name as it did when you tried to create a copy of the report file in the same directory as the original The system allows you to have files of the same name in different directories because the path name of each remains unique In this case the first path name is usr larry report and the second path name is usr larry quiksell report Level 1 Level 2 bint etc usr Level 3 larry user2 user3 Level 4 1988 cal mesg phone policies icit report
209. le name usr larry quiksell INSERT Line 3 Since history is kept only for structured files select the option to create a structured file A blank file will appear on your screen this is considered to be the first version of the file 4 Type the following text 84 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY Software tools for the sales industry that provide a revolutionary approach to sales from the QuikSell Corporation usr larry quiksell sample INSERT Line 6 2 1 Creating Versions of a File When you terminate an editing session the system saves the modified file provides a way of saving a file including all changes without terminating the editing session three ver sions of the sample file 1 Use to save this version of the file Now add a new line at the top of the file as shown Many Fortune 1000 companies have already discovered that QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY Software tools for the sales industry that provide a revolutionary approach to sales from the QuikSell Corporation usr larry quiksell sample INSERT Line 2 Use SAVE then change the text again as indicated TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 85 Many Fortune 1000 companies have already discovered that QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY Software tools that make sales management efficient and accurate from the QuikSell Corporation usr larry quiksell sample INSERT Line
210. lines are moved up 7 lines If the specified number of lines extends beyond the end of the file a sufficient number of blank lines is supplied to provide a total of n lines in the pick buffer PICK UP can also be used in conjunction with a cursor defined argument 8 2 to remove either a specific number of lines or a block If lines of text are designated the effect is the same as ENTER n PICK UP If an area is defined the designated portion 20 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 of each line is picked up and the characters to the right of the area move to the left 7 4 Backspace BACKSPACE moves the cursor to the left In overwrite mode it moves the cursor to the left by one position replacing any existing character with a blank character In insert mode it moves the cur sor to the left by one position deleting the character at that position and moving all characters to the right of the deleted character one position to the left Characters deleted with are not saved and must be retyped to be recovered 7 5 Deleting Characters DELETE CHARACTER deletes the character at the current cursor position and moves all characters to the right of the deleted charac ter one position to the left The cursor does not move Characters deleted with DELETE CHARACTER are not saved and must be retyped to be recovered 7 6 Deleting the End of a Line ENTER DELETE CHARACTER DELETE CHARACTER deletes the current line from the
211. litting Lines Joining Lines M Defining Rectangular Areas Using BOX MARK X Adding Lines Using BOX MARK i Deleting and Duplicating Lines Using BOX MARK k Defining Nonrectangular Areas Using TEXT MARK Deleting or Moving Sentences Using TEXT MARK Moving Words Lines and Paragraphs Duplicating Words Lines and Paragraphs Inserting Moving Deleting and Duplicating a Specific Number of Lines Opening Moving Deleting and Duplicating Columns Moving to a Specific Line in a File i e Searching for Specific Text Performing Individual Search and Replace Accessing Two or More Files int 4 20 1 Viewing an Alternate File 4 20 2 Creating Multiple Windows FILE MANAGER 4 Copying Files NOE NE Renaming Files Deleting Files Path Names and Directory Structure Creating Directories rA nE ON Ae n cu Moving Files Between Directories a ee ER Copying Files Between Directories Alternate Methods of Changing Directories 5 8 1 Full and Relative Path Names 5 8 2 Parent Directories et Garvie cas ce tS Removing Directories Ay Ted o Recovering Directories From jputdir TE File and Directory Permissions 5 11 1 Changing Permissions on Files and Directories New Task Menu Options 5 12 1 Executing a Command From the Editor Subshell 5 12 2 Executing a Command in a d Box 5 12 3 Showing Your Profiles Directory 5 12 4 Editing Your Editor
212. ll this Pat s ideas on the campaign seemed a bit odd to me Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I ll begin working up some new copy for the campaign We should meet with the following people before the end of the week Winkler Larson Adams Pantages Sternig usr larry report INSERT Line 3 Alphabetize the list by using PICK UP on each line to be moved positioning the cursor at the location where you want the line moved and using PUT DOWN I read it all and it looks ok to me Are we going to get together in the next few days to discuss all this Pat s ideas on the campaign seemed a bit odd to me Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I ll begin working up some new copy for the campaign We should meet with the following people before the end of the week Adams Larson Pantages Sternig Winkler usr larry report INSERT Line 4 14 Duplicating Words Lines and Paragraphs and are used to pick up a copy of text without altering the file and subsequently put one or more copies TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 45 down PUT COPY differs from PUT DOWN in that PUT COPY does not remove the text from the pick buffer To copy a single line use PICK COPY position t
213. m your New Task Menu 1 With the cursor on the line describing the quiksell direc tory use DELETE A copy of the quiksell directory and all files and sub directories contained within it is now located in usr larry putdir You have not seen putdir listed in your home directory because files and directories whose names begin with a are not usually visible in the directory display they are hidden by the system provides a way to list such hidden files 2 Use LOCAL MENU INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book P D File Manager r Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information 1 Display visible files 2 Display all files Return to normal directory display 4 Show details about files 5 Show more details about this file Show more details about this file usr larry INSERT Line 3 Select 2 Display all files 4 GO TO the top of the directory listing TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 67 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description pr6ceb962e 8CC005b79f estate index 11og profile putdir scomb 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Co
214. mber of lines in the document C Instruct the system to search that number of lines or use a very large number such as 999 Alternatively estimate the number of lines in your file and use a large number 2 Position the cursor at the beginning of the area where the search and replace is to begin Use ENTER 4 Enter the number of paragraphs or lines if required the tar get string and the replacement string 5 Use DO For example to replace xxx with yyy in the next three para graphs use ENTER 3 rpl xxx yyy DO To replace xxx with yyy in the next 100 lines use ENTER 1001 rpl xxx yyy DO Note that the number 100 is followed by the letter 1 These characters have special meanings to rpl x d oe do owe et os Use these characters with caution they must all be preceded by a V to escape their special meanings See rp 1 for details 8 6 Using the Spell Program The spell 1 program is used to check the spelling of all words in a text file against a list of commonly used words Words not on the list or derivable by adding certain prefixes suffixes or inflections to a word in the list are output as possible errors The spell program helps discover typographical errors it does not proof the document It searches only for misspelled words a correctly spelled word that is used incorrectly is ignored For exam ple if in is typed instead of is the spell program will not detect it as an err
215. minals def trm Structured file describing standard control shift keyboard Y tconvert def trm trm always uses etc termcap trm Structured file describing how to use both screen and keyboard on any terminal tdigest trm terms bin terms bin Binary file containing all the information in trm for efficient use by INed Figure 9 Relationship of Terminal Description Files TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 53 Typical usage is to make trm from etc termcap then modify the keyboard mapping for some terminals to make use of special terminal keyboard features such as extra keys The file de trm is a structured file that describes all supported terminals To see how a terminal is described access def trm move the cursor to the appropriate line in the Output Sequences column and ZOOM IN The left hand column lists the names of output sequences The middle column gives a brief description of what the output sequence does The right hand column gives the codes implementing the sequence for the terminal The sequence names and the representa tion for the codes are taken directly from the notation used in the termcap database The input sequences are shown when you to a terminal description with the cursor in the Input Sequences column The notation for the input and output code sequences is similar to that used in etc termcap Before entering the editor set the environment variabl
216. mpany Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line The directory listing now includes the names of a number of hidden files most of which are created and used internally by the system The hidden files that will be discussed in this tutorial are putdir bak old index and files See 5 13 for more information about these hidden files 5 With the cursor on the line containing the name putdir ZOOM INj The File Manager display for the putdir directory will appear on the screen INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description 0 copy 0 quiksell usr larry putdir INSERT Line Files and directories are saved in putdir under their origi nal file names prefixed with a number The system uses such a prefix in order to avoid duplicate file names in pu tdir 68 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 The quiksell directory for example is saved in putdir under the name 0 quiksell The descriptive text from the Description field is not saved 6 To recover the quikse11 directory move the cursor to the line containing the directory name and use PICK COPY Do not use in the putdir directory unless you wish to completely remove the file or directory from the system Files and directories removed from putdir with or cannot be again 7 ZOOM OUT to your home directory then use PU
217. n E s B IS Bl S il fS E B 8 lj BACKSPACE BEGIN LINE Keystrokes ESC then 1 on the numeric keypad ESC then 2 on the numeric keypad ESC then 3 on the numeric keypad ESC then 4 on the numeric keypad ESC then 5 on the numeric keypad ESC then 6 on the numeric keypad ESC then 7 on the numeric keypad ESC then 8 on the numeric keypad between the numeric keypad and the main keyboard between the numeric keypad and the main keyboard between the numeric keypad and the main keyboard between the numeric keypad and the main keyboard Zr on the main keyboard ALT a on the main keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 23 ALT b on the main keyboard BREAK between the numeric keypad and the main keyboard pes ALT v on the main keyboard ALT c on the main keyboard ALT 1 on the main keyboard DEL between the numeric keypad and the main keyboard ALT x on the main keyboard ALT z on the main keyboard ALT e on the main keyboard ALT e on the main keyboard ALT d on the main keyboard FONT ESC then o on the main keyboard e ALT f on the main keyboard ESC then h on the main keyboard ALT g on the main keyboard ALT 7 on the numeric keypad ALT on the main keyboard ALT o on the main keyboard ESC then i on the main keyboard ESC then y on the main keyboard LEFT ESC then 1 on the main keyboard ALT 2 on the numeric keypad 7 Do not confuse this key with DEL CHAR 24 FEED z Bi E gt z n B
218. n all the new temporary files have been revised use the cat 1 command ENTER cat list of filenames gt filename MENU to combine them all back into one file For example to combine rev2aa rev2ab rev2ac and rev2ad into a file named revision2 use cat rev2aa rev2ab rev2ac gt revision2 Split the report file into three files using split then rejoin them using cat 8 9 Searching for a Subject Within a Directory The grep 1 command can be used to find a file in a specific direc tory when the subject is known but the file name is not Use this procedure to locate references to a subject within a directory l Change to the directory in which the search is to be con ducted 2 Use ENTER 3 Type grep subject where subject is the word or phrase to be searched for If the subject consists of more than one word enclose it in quotation marks For example to search for the names of all files that mention the Widget Cor poration type grep Widget Corporation x 4 Use MENU The system lists all files in which the subject is mentioned followed by the lines containing the word or phrase subject Practice using grep by searching for the subject QuikSell in your home directory 8 10 Changing Your Password Your password should be changed periodically to ensure the security of your files To change your password 106 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Use IMENU 2 Select Execute UNIX shell commands then
219. n operation that makes no sense such as deleting 3 lines Most of the error messages issued by the editor are listed below in alphabetical order Error messages not listed probably indicate sys tem or editor malfunctions and should be reported if they persist It should be noted that in the event an operating system problem prevents a file from being saved your editing session will not be lost After the problem is corrected type e without an argument at the command level to cause automatic recovery of the file 1 GLOSSARY Field A field is an attribute of a structured data file and is defined in the form used to enter and display data A field is assigned either a text data path or a tree data path A field with a text data path can contain only text a field with a tree data path also referred to as an indexed or list field contains more complex data Ganged Fields Ganged fields are spatially adjacent fields that have tree data paths with at least one element common to all members of the gang Indexed Field An indexed field is used in a structured data file and has a tree data path Indexed fields are often adjacent to one another in a form see also Ganged Fields This example shows ganged indexed fields 48 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Item An item consists of the data in one line of an indexed field List Field A list field is the same as an indexed field Structured File A structured file c
220. n the line on which the file is listed and ZOOM IN J Because the file already exists no menu appears 14 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 2 12 Logging Out If your system administrator has arranged for you to automatically log in to and log out of the TEN PLUS environment you can log out of the system by using EXIT You know you have logged out because the system prompts for the user name of the next user with the login prompt If your system is not configured to allow direct entry into the TEN PLUS environment when you log in you must exit the TEN PLUS environment before logging out To exit the TEN PLUS environment use EXIT This causes the system prompt to display Once the prompt appears log out by using the logout sequence for your keyboard provided in the appropriate section of TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Log in again with your user name and if you have one your password TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 15 3 TYPING AND FORMATTING TECHNIQUES Until now all of the exercises in this tutorial have used unformatted text with preset margins and tabs The INed text editor also lets you set margins and tabs and provides basic formatting facilities These typing and formatting techniques are covered in this section 3 1 Changing the Left Hand Margin When a file is created or opened the left hand margin is in the first column to the right of the left hand window border The setting is indicated by the pl
221. n the other Printing Documents To print a document ZOOM IN until its contents are visible then use PRINT A menu appears listing the print options available on your system To print a document on your default printer position the cursor at the option Print on default printer and use EXECUTE Refer to section 3 of TEN PLUS Profiles in this guide for addi tional information about the Print Menu TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 25 FOR MORE INFORMATION This concludes your introduction to the TEN PLUS environment The TEN PLUS environment consists of the TEN PLUS User Inter face described briefly in this primer as well as optional develop ment tools and applications such as the TEN PLUS Mail System After you have learned the basic TEN PLUS functions you may want to know more about advanced TEN PLUS functions and capa bilities such as the ability to display and work with several files windows at the same time The TEN PLUS Tutorial in this guide reviews the ten basic functions and describes in detail various advanced functions available in the TEN PLUS User Interface Refer to the TEN PLUS Reference Manual in this guide for more information about specific TEN PLUS User Interface capabilities 2 o TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 SUMMARY OF TEN PLUS FUNCTIONS This section summarizes the ten basic functions as well as a number of additional functions that are available with the TEN PLUS
222. nated key For example is invoked by touching CTRL and a together then releasing both keys and touching s Touch ESC then touch the appropriate number on the main keyboard above the alpha characters For example 1 is invoked by touching ESC then touching 1 on the main key board To log out from the system level hold down the CTRL key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes ESC then 1 on the keyboard ESC then 2 on the keyboard ESC then 3 on the keyboard ESC then 4 on the keyboard ESC then 5 on the keyboard ESC then 6 on the keyboard ESC then 7 on the keyboard ESC then 8 on the keyboard on the upper row of the keyboard on the upper row of the keyboard on the upper row of the keyboard on the upper row of the keyboard FUMES B Bl aeiee Ej CKSPACE BACKSPACE to the left of the break key TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 17 CTRL b on the keyboard BOX MARK CTRL a then b BREAK BREAK in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard CANCEL to the right of the numeric keypad CTRL a then c E E z ane za E Z amp CTRL c on the keyboard DELETE CHARACTER DELETE key CTRL x on the keyboard CTRL e on the keyboard ENTER ENTER to the right of the numeric keypad ENTER to the right of the numeric keypad CTRL d on the keyboard CTRL f on the keyboard 7 on the numeric keypad a mmEIS EIL T EEE T QE g Z H z S Z un CTRL a then j on the keyboard
223. nction listed as the Editor Function The following are sample input sequences from the VT100 terminal descrip tion Editor Function Value Key Name DELETE CHARACTER 0177 DELETE HELP um CTRL MENU OP PF 1 The escape sequences defined as output sequences map terminal capa bilities such as clear screen and cursor motion to the specific terminal commands that initiate those capabilities In addition other capabili ties that are generally thought of as input related such as the definitions of the BREAK and QUIT characters are described as output sequences because input sequences are used to define only INed func tion mappings Because the input sequences contain no provisions for boolean values such as whether and are mapped to the same key these are also defined as output sequences The out put sequences include terminal dependent output string sequences modifiers such as boolean flags e g whether the terminal supports automatic margin wrapping and numbers e g the number of lines and columns on the screen and input related escape sequences Each entry in the Output Sequences includes three fields Name Meaning and Value The Name field contains the two character TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 terms 4 Base terms 4 mnemonic for the terminal capability as defined by the INed editor or in termcap The Meaning field contains the data type string numeric or boolean of the capability and a short descr
224. ng 15 16 structured files utility programs 43 subdirectory creating 7 subshell entering 43 subshell exiting 43 switching current alternate files 16 TAB 11 tab stops 11 tab stops default 24 tabs clearing 11 24 tabs intext files 36 tabs setting 11 24 tee filter 34 TEN PLUS environment exiting 5 17 TEN PLUS system initializing 4 ecccee EX Teccece 29 text centering 33 text editing 2 text editing functions 18 text file format 36 text formatting 32 text moving between files 21 text processing functions 31 33 text retrieving deleted 25 TEXT MARK 28 29 TEXT MARK terminating 29 time and date filter 34 trailing spaces in text files 36 68 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 tlo 1n undoing FORMAT operations 32 USE 16 User Interface components 2 utility programs structured files 43 versions 43 wastebasket buffer 25 wastebasket buffer adding lines to 25 wastebasket buffer restoring lines from 25 WINDOW 23 window current 23 window dividing 23 window editing 23 window moving horizontally 24 window positioning functions 12 windows 2 windows changing 23 windows creating several 23 windows deleting 23 word wrap 18 32 ZOOM IN 15 25 ZOOM OUT 15 25 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1 1 Overview of This Document Enhanced AT 2 1 The Enhanced AT Keyboard oar 2 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the Enhanced AT Keyboard uu EC AT 3 1 The AT K
225. ng Files Copying Files Moving Files Renaming Files Deleting Files Creating Directories Accessing Directories Copying Directories Moving Directories Renaming Directories Removing Directories Using LOCAL MENU With the File Manager 2 2 23 2 UA CR UO P2 HISTORY DISPLAY Accessing the History Display Accessing the Versions of a File Using LOCAL MENU with the dpi Display Saving a Version of a File CURSOR AND WINDOW POSITIONING FUNCTIONS NONDNo000o 1 1 100000 NWARPPWWWWNNNY 5 1 Cursor Positioning Functions 5 2 Window Positioning Functions TEN PLUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS 6 1 Canceling Operation BREAK 6 2 Error Message and Other Explanations HELP 6 3 Accessing the Operating System and Other Files MENU m Lx 6 4 Removing Boxes CANCEL 6 5 Controlling Detail ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT 6 6 Printing a Document PRINT amp s 6 7 Selecting Data Specific Function LOCAL MENU 6 8 Looking at Other Items NEXT and PREVIOUS 6 9 Editing and Creating Alternate Files USE 6 10 Saving Files Without Exiting the Edito SAVE INTERACTIVE TEXT EDITING FUNCTIONS 7 1 Inserting Characters INSERT MODE 7 2 Inserting Lines and Areas Splitting Lines INSERT 7 3 Moving Lines and Areas Joining Lines PICK UP 7 4 Backspace BACKSPACE z 7 5 Deleting Characters DELETE CHARACTER 7 6 Deleting the End of a Line ENTER DELETE CHARACTER 7 7 Dupl
226. ng a window 23 DO 31 33 DO with interactive programs 31 DO without ENTER oran argument 32 duplicating alineor area 20 editing structured data 16 editing text 2 editing wide lines 24 editing window 23 editor profile 14 36 END LINE 12 27 29 end of file moving to 23 ENTER 11 27 28 29 31 33 ENTER USE 25 ENTER argument DO 31 ENTER DELETE CHARACTER 20 ENTER filename SAVE 17 ENTER filename USE 16 ENTER filename WINDOW 23 ENTER FONT 33 ENTER GO TO 13 23 ENTER horizontal motion MARGIN 32 ENTER INSERT 19 ENTER letter FONT 33 ENTER LINE 12 ENTER MARGIN 32 ENTER motion INSERT 19 ENTER n CENTER 33 ENTER n GO TO 13 22 ENTER nINSERT 19 ENTER n LEFT 13 24 ENTER n t LINE 12 ENTER n t PAGE 12 ENTER n PICK COPY 20 ENTER n PICK UP 19 ENTER n PUT COPY 21 ENTER n PUT DOWN 21 ENTER n RESTORE 25 ENTER n RIGHT 13 24 ENTER NEXT WINDOW 23 ENTER PICK UP 19 66 ENTER REPLACE 22 ENTER SEARCH 22 ENTER SET TAB 24 ENTER string REPLACE 22 ENTER string SEARCH 21 ENTER USE 16 ENTER vertical motion CENTER 33 ENTER WINDOW 23 ENTER with argument 27 ENTER with cursor defined argument 28 environment variable 31 error messages 14 47 errors when typing argument 27 EXIT 5 exiting a file 6 exiting TEN PLUS environment 5 17 file 25 file accessing 6 file ASCII 4 file copying 6 file creating 6 file deleting 7 file exiting 6 file format 36 file history 4 file initializing 6 File Manager capabiliti
227. nly be used in fields with text data paths ganged fields have tree data paths Action To manipulate data in a ganged field use pick and put operations in conjunction with BOX MARK and the horizontal and or vertical cursor positioning functions Cannot write to tmp Cause The operation you are trying to perform requires the editor to write to the tmp directory The editor is unable to complete the operation either because you do not have permission to write in the directory or there is not enough room in the directory Action Contact your system administrator Cannot zoom in any further Cause You have used ZOOM IN at the lowest level of this file you cannot ZOOM IN any further Action No action required Cannot zoom out any further Cause You have used ZOOM OUT in the top directory You cannot ZOOM OUT any further Action No action required Character to be quoted must be a letter Cause You have attempted to use to insert a char acter into the file The correct sequence is followed by an alphabetic character The control equivalent is then inserted into the file You have used a nonalphabetic character that has no control equivalent Action Determine the correct text character to type and try again 54 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Command does not take a numeric argument Cause You have used ENTER followed by a number fol lowed by a function The function however does
228. not take a numeric argument Action Refer to 8 to determine the correct way to accom plish what you want to do and try again Command does not take a region argument Cause You have specified a region argument using the cur sor positioning functions with either BOX MARK or TEXT MARK to a function that does not accept region arguments Action Refer to 8 to determine the correct way to accom plish what you want to do and try again Command does not take a string argument Cause You have used ENTER followed by a string followed by a function The function however does not take a string argument Action Refer to 8 to determine the correct way to accom plish what you want to do and try again Command does not take an empty argument string Cause You have used ENTER followed by a function The function however does not take an empty argument string Action Refer to 88 to determine the correct way to accom plish what you want to do and try again Command stopped by BREAK Cause You have used BREAK while the editor was execut ing a command in a popup box Action No action required Directory directory does not exist Cause You have attempted to edit a file in a nonexistent directory Action Specify a path to a file using existing directory names TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 55 Error in LOCAL MENU program Cause There is a problem in the application you are
229. ns from menus Refer to TEN PLUS Profiles for additional information about the Profile Helper 2 1 4 The Print Helper The TEN PLUS Print Helper allows users to print a file by selecting an option from the Print Menu The options on the Print Menu can be customized by editing the print profile Like the Profile Helper the Print Helper uses forms to build the custom Print Menu The custom Print Menu simplifies print ing operations in the TEN PLUS environment by giving the user a choice of menu options for printing a file Refer to TEN PLUS Profiles for additional information about the Print Helper 2 1 5 The History Display The TEN PLUS History Display provides a way to keep track of changes made to structured files It displays a form detailing infor mation about previous changes to a file and allows the user to recall and see any previous version It also enables the user to copy a pre vious version of a file into the current file for editing 4 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 The History Display uses menus and forms to implement its func tions History Display functions are accessed by positioning the cur sor at the desired option on the menu or form and using a function Like the File Manager it does not require knowledge of any specific commands or syntax 2 2 File Types The INed editor can edit two types of files ASCII and structured ASCII files are standard text files coded in the American Standard
230. nsCorp schedule permit usr larry practice memo INSERT Line TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 17 You can use INSERT to insert as many blank lines as you wish For example you can use INSERT to insert space for new para graphs or to reserve space for diagrams on a printed copy of a file In the above example the second paragraph needs to be reformatted because it begins with a short line Position the cursor on the short line and use FORMAT FORMAT reformats text to fit within the current margins I wanted to solicit your thoughts about the possibility of Lisa attending the Sales Conference next week I know that she s working on getting the display materials ready for the TransCorp presentation next month but if you could spare her I think it would be a valuable experience for her internship and an asset to us if we hire her upon graduation One of the problems with a lot of MBAs when they get out of school is that they don t have a good feel for the personal side of business I think it would be good for Lisa to get some of this exposure What do you think Will the TransCorp schedule permit usr larry practice memo INSERT Line w FORMAT reformats text from the current cursor position to the next blank line Be sure to leave one or more blank lines between paragraphs as you type Otherwise FORMAT will run all of your paragraphs together 18 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 USING MENUS The
231. o a structured file SYNOPSIS tconvert inputfile outputfile DESCRIPTION FILES Tconvert reads record 0 from the file def trm to get the default input mappings and graphics output mappings g0 g9 and x0 x1 then copies all records from inputfile to outputfile Next tconvert scans etc termcap or the file that the environment variable TERMCAP if set points to for terminal descriptions of terminals not already listed in the inputfile and builds a record array of the termcap data for each new terminal to be added while merging in the default input and out put mappings Finally tconvert appends the new record s to outputfile The resulting merged terminal descriptions are only rough drafts gen erally sufficient for use by the INed termcap editor e 1 but likely in need of improvement to make use of any special function keys or capa bilities that the newly added terminal s may offer Such improve ments must be made to the new records in outputfile prior to using it as input to digest 1 To facilitate changes in outputfile via the edi tor the name of the outputfile must be trm or contain the suffix trm otherwise the proper forms needed for editing of the file will not be called by the editor The terminal names tconvert uses are the ones in the second field of the termcap entries Records from the inputfile override termcap entries usr lib INed termcap def trm default terminal descriptions for INed termcap editor
232. o be used to delete text simply that text and do not put it down Using PICK COPY and PUT COPY and are similar in function to and PUT DOWN However leaves the original line where it was and only picks up a copy allows you to put down several copies of the last line picked up by using either PICK UP or PICK COPY Create a file named copiers in your practice directory then enter this text Evaluation chart for buying new copier BRAND cost SPEED QUALITY SERVICE Hybrid II 2 300 100 per min B A Comments Has enlargement reduction features LED displays Paper refill easy toner refill somewhat clumsy _ usr larry practice copiers INSERT Line In this example you typed in information about one brand of copier Hybrid II To use the same headings BRAND COST SPEED QUALITY SERVICE to begin a new section for another brand move the cursor to the heading line and use PICK COPY Then move the cursor to where you wish to start typing your evalua tion of the second brand and PUT DOWN the copy 14 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 Evaluation chart for buying new copier BRAND cost SPEED QUALITY SERVICE Hybrid II 2 300 100 per min B A Comments Has enlargement reduction features LED displays Paper refill easy toner refill somewhat clumsy QUALITY SERVICE usr larry practice copiers INSERT Line In this example you could have used instead of PUT DOWN to continue putting copies
233. o edit file or press Cancel or Help Cause You have entered a file name that contains characters that do not display for example control characters Action EXECUTE to edit this file otherwise CANCEL There is no item number in this list Cause You have used number or number PRO to move to a specific item how ever and do not work at this level of the file Action Use or if possible then try using NEXT or PREVIOUS If and PREVIOUS work use ENTER number NEXT or ENTER number PREVIOUS to move to a specific item There is no LOCAL MENU for this data Cause You have used LOCAL MENU when there is no local menu for the type of data being edited Action No action required There is no place available to save files Cause You have tried to move or copy files using DELETE PICK UP or PICK COPY The files are usually saved before they are moved but the File Manager is unable to perform the save either because you do not have write permission in your HOME putdir directory or because your user i d has changed Action Make sure that your HOME putdir directory allows you write permission Contact your system administrator if necessary TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 61 Unable to close file file during SAVE Cause You have used SAVE while editing the current file but due to a lack of space on the disk the system cannot save the file Action Contact
234. o manipulate multiline sen tences and nonrectangular text regions Used with to directly access another file Also used to switch back and forth between two files TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 31 GLOSSARY ASCII file An ordinary text file ASCII stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange and refers to the way characters are represented in a computer cursor A cursor is a pointer on your screen to where the next action will take place When typing the cursor indicates the position where the next character will appear When using a TEN PLUS function the cursor indicates the line or paragraph on which that function will operate cursor positioning functions The functions that permit you to move the cursor from one position to another Examples are TAB TAB t W 7 and ENTER default The option that will be chosen for you by the system if you do not make a choice For example margins and tabs are set automatically by the system so that you do not have to set them every time you access a file You can however change many of these settings at will Also if your computer system has several printers and you print a document it will be printed on the default printer unless you select another one directory An TEN PLUS directory contains documents or files and or other directories A typical directory contains related documents such as memoranda or monthly sales reports fiel
235. o the TEN PLUS User Interface and does not provide a complete reference to all of its extensive facilities Refer to the TEN PLUS Reference Manual for more detailed information about available commands Refer to other sections of this tutorial for information about editing and for matting documents 1 2 Overview of This Tutorial This tutorial describes the three main features of the TEN PLUS User Interface the INed editor the File Manager and the His tory Display The sections included are 1 INTRODUCTION This section provides a general overview of the tutorial 2 GETTING STARTED This section describes how to start up and log in to the TEN PLUS system It introduces the INed editor and teaches the user to create a file use the keyboard TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 scroll within a file modify functions access the HELP facilities ZOOM IN to a file ZOOM OUT of a file access existing files This section ends with information about exiting the TEN PLUS system and logging out 3 TYPING AND FORMATTING TECHNIQUES This section explains techniques for formatting text It describes how to change margins and tabs center and align text and access alternate fonts 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES This section covers techniques for inserting deleting moving copying and searching for text It also explains how to delete copy and move blocks of text columns and sentences This section ends with a discussion of
236. oard Input Sequences and a list of the terminal escape sequences used to update the screen Output Sequences A default version of def trm with various terminal descriptions is installed in the directory usr lib INed termcap The definitions in this file which can be modified may be available to all users Alter nately individual users can modify private copies of def trm to cus tomize their terminal capabilities to their needs Def trm consists of a list of records each entry of which is one termi nal description Record O of def trm contains a set of default input mappings and graphics output mappings that are used by tconvert 1 to create new INed terminal descriptions from a termcap database The fields in each record are Terminal Type Output Sequences and Input Sequences To view the output sequences for a specific terminal ZOOM IN type ZOOM IN on the Output Sequences for that type To view the input sequences for a specific terminal type ZOOM IN on the Input Sequences for that type Input sequences map INed functions to specific keys or combinations of keys The fields included in each entry are Editor Function Value and Key Name The Editor Function field lists each INed function by name The Value field lists the code produced by the terminal obtained from the terminal s technical manual that initiates the named function The Key Name field contains a mnemonic identifier for the keys that invoke the fu
237. of a structured nontext file Because each user has or can create this particular structured nontext file it will be used as an illustration although you will probably not want to save its history All structured files are record oriented but there is a difference between the records in a structured text file and those in a struc tured nontext file The records for a text file such as the sample file correspond to the lines of text in the file The records for a structured nontext file such as editorprf contain information from the parts of the file listed at the top level and text contained at more detailed levels Access your editorprf file TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 91 1 Use MENU and select Edit your editor profile Editor Profile File This file allows you to modify the behavior of the editor to suit your preferences Put the cursor on the line of interest and ZOOM IN to specify your choice of options MENU Options HELP Options Files the Editor Should Watch Editor Search Paths usr larry profiles editorprf INSERT This is the top level of your editorprf Each line corresponds to a record Each record listed here contains more detailed levels which can be accessed with ZOOM IN 2 ZOOM IN on MENU Options Options Description shown in menu Type Name of file or program Show home directory file SHOME Execute UNIX shell commands Screen echo Touch CNTL D to continue ed Run a shell c
238. of the window 7 13 Creating More Than One Window WINDOW When a file is opened the screen contains one large editing window This window can be divided into several smaller windows each con taining its own file and each with the window and cursor at the desired positions in the file A new window is created by dividing an existing window into two smaller windows If the cursor is on the first line in a window that window is divided vertically at the cursor position Otherwise the window is divided horizontally at the cursor position To divide a window position the cursor in the window to be divided and use filename WINDOW where filename is the name of the file to be contained in the window A horizontal division creates a new window below the new boundary A vertical division creates a new window to the right of the new boundary When is used the new window becomes the current win dow and displays the file specified as the argument without an argument creates a new window containing the beginning portion of the file in the current window The remainder of the old window continues to display its current file It is reactivated by using NEXT WINDOW 87 14 The active window during an editing session is called the current window The cursor is positioned in the current window NEXT WINDOW activates another window as the current window Windows are deleted by using ENTERj WINDOW The window containing the cu
239. of the heading at the begin ning of each new section without having to use each time inserts a copy of the same line until you pick up another line by using either or PICK COPY PICK UP PUT DOWN PICK COPY and can also be used to move copy and delete entire files and directories For example you can delete a file or directory from a directory by plac ing the cursor in either field on the line where the file is listed and using PICK UP mm Deleting a directory deletes all files and directories in that directory You can transfer a file from one directory to another perhaps from your home directory to another directory containing several related files This procedure is similar to that for transferring data between files Use and or to access the directory containing the file you wish to transfer Position the cursor on the line where the file is Ur OW RE the file move to the des tination directory and the file You can also use this procedure to move directories PICK COPY and PUT COPY can be used to copy rather than move files and directories For example you might want to main tain a master version of a form letter that can be copied and com pleted as needed Position the cursor on the line where the file is TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 15 listed and use PICK COPY Next move to the destination direc tory and use PUT DOWN If you copy a file into its original direc tory a popup box appears a
240. of the main keyboard PRINT to the left of the main keyboard d 3 E 2 E CANCEL ALT RESET to the left of the main keyboard 26 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 6 ESPRIT ESP 6310 6 1 The Esprit ESP 6310 Keyboard Figure 5 shows the Esprit ESP 6310 keyboard layout and function j locations for the TEN PLUS system The keyboard layout assumes a that the terminal is in the Hazeltine emulation mode ws PUT REFRESH m T9 LT rers B coos E TI i eem T T TR TO pe re a a Fe INSERT MODE To invoke a function indicated by 23 hold down the Func key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by KJ hold down the Shift key and touch the designated key at the same time Figure 5 Esprit ESP 6310 Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System Zz eseejey uoneuuojuj pseoghey SNTd NIL 4c 28 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 6 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the Esprit ESP 6310 Keyboard Functions are accessed in one of three ways on the Esprit ESP 6310 1 Touch the defined key For example HELP is invoked by touching 5 on the numeric keypad 2 Hold down the Func key then touch the defined key For example is invoked by holding down the Func key and touching x 3 Hold down the Shift key then touch the defined key For example 1 is invoked by holding down the Shift key and touching F1 The only exception is QUIT which is invoked
241. of the numeric keypad to the left of the numeric keypad to the left of the numeric keypad to the left of the numeric keypad zl 0 0 8 E gl Bl s eaae CKSPACE Word Char in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard BEGIN LINE Shift F7 above the keyboard BOX MARK Ctrl b on the keyboard TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 41 BREAK Break above the keyboard Remove to the left of the numeric keypad Ctrl c on the keyboard PF 1 above the numeric keypad PF4 above the numeric keypad Do above the keyboard Shift F8 above the keyboard Enter to the right of the numeric keypad XECUTE Select to the left of the numeric keypad Ctrl d on the keyboard Ctrl f on the keyboard 3 Z PF3 above the numeric keypad FUNCTIONS Shift F13 above the keyboard Ctr1 g on the keyboard HELP Help above the keyboard Ctrl h on the keyboard Insert Here to the left of the numeric keypad Shift F12 above the keyboard LAST ARG Ctrl 1 on the keyboard F7 above the keyboard L F 10 above the keyboard F9 above the keyboard Ctrl j on the keyboard LOCAL MENU 9 on the numeric keypad MARGIN Shift F11 above the keyboard F 11 above the keyboard T 5 42 NEXT PAGE PICK UP m d Z E WB gt x 3 E 4 e Ja S 5 B Su v 5 Z lt e azi z e z PUT m kz Ol Kk SEE 35H z Z m m Z S Im z A L ej i l TET 7 le c SE TEN PLUS Keyboard Informat
242. of the pick buffer to the current cursor position removing it from the buffer If a numeric argument to either function is specified with ENTER the specified number of copies of the newest data in the buffer is inserted at the cursor location Text is inserted into the file in one of two ways depending on whether a set of lines or an area of text is inserted Lines of text inserted with or are inserted at the current line and all subsequent lines are moved down to make room for the inserted lines Areas of text inserted with or are inserted with the upper left hand corner of the area at the current cursor position The portions of the affected lines to the right of and including the cursor column are moved to the right to make room for the inserted text This sometimes causes the affected lines to move beyond the right hand window border PUT COPY and PUT DOWN can be used with PICK COPY or PICK UP to move text from one file to another The contents of the buffer are unchanged when windows or current files are switched Refer to and NEXT WINDOW 86 10 7 14 for additional information about moving between files or windows 7 9 Searching for a Text String SEARCH and SEARCH ENTER string SEARCH where string is any sequence of printing characters searches forward in the current file for the next occurrence of string The search begins at the character immedi ately after the cursor If the string is found the cursor is mo
243. ommand in a box popbox Shell command Show your profiles directory file SHOME profiles Edit your editor profile file HOME profiles editorprf Housekeep popbox housekeep Display history of current file helper history usr larry profiles editorprf INSERT 3 With the cursor on Show home directory ZOOM IN 92 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Details of MENU Option Description shown in menu Type Name of file or program Show home directory jene suonz Flags any non space character means true Sync and reopen file Save all files usr larry profiles editorprf INSERT Line Each of these more detailed levels is a part of the MENU Options record which in turn is part of the editorprf file You can use the History Display to recreate a version of a struc tured nontext file such as editorprf Remember that you will be recreating the entire file and not just one portion of it The recreated version will include both the top level listing of all the records and the more detailed levels of text contained in each of those records It should be noted that versions of structured nontext files such as editorprf must be saved in files with specific names For edi tor profile files the name must either be editorprf or end in editorprf For example you might save a version of your editorprf under a name such as o1d editorprf For File Manager profile files the name must be either indexprf or end in indexprf
244. ompletion You can use any of these functions to edit the text typed into a popup box TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 13 BACKSPACE BEGIN LINE END LINE DELETE CHARACTER 2 9 Using the TEN PLUS HELP and CANCEL Functions As mentioned previously provides either general information during an editing session or specific information pertaining to the message in a popup box Although there is no need to explore all available topics now it is important to review the Help Menu and become familiar with its facilities Refer to 8 1 for additional information about HELP Practice using HELP and CANCEL 1 Use HELP The Help Menu will appear on the screen Note that various topics are covered 2 Use CANCEL to remove the Help Menu Use ENTER The ENTER popup box will appear on the screen 4 Use j HELP Note that the information now focuses on ENTER 5 Use CANCEL to return to the ENTER popup box 6 Use CANCEL again to remove the popup box from the display 2 10 Exiting a File The screen that displays your home directory is the File Manager screen The File Manager is the primary utility used to create access and delete files and directories When you are finished editing a file ZOOM OUTI to return to the File Manager screen You can ZOOM OUT no matter where the cursor is located in the file 2 11 Accessing Existing Files To access a file in your home directory position the cursor o
245. on pattern is in PATH pattern is not in PATH criteria criterion criteria criteria and criterion criteria or criterion where pattern is a string that can be compiled by regex 3 for exam ple Frank 2 84 6 9 0 9 4 and PATH is the TEN PLUS path to the node to be checked for the value A sample criteria might contain California is in Address State or Nevada is in Address State and Peter is in Name or Paul is in Name or Mary is in Name This example selects all records that have Peter Paul or Mary in the Name field and California or Nevada in the State field The catsf utility does not attempt to verify that the record structures of the various inputfiles are consistent a bizarre outputfile will result if they are not TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 e 1 Base e 1 NAME e INed screen editor SYNOPSIS e ar filename line col searchkey 1 DESCRIPTION The e command invokes the INed screen editor INed may be initial ized in several ways depending on the arguments given to the e command e filename Initialize INed at the first page of the indicated file If the file does not exist an instruction box indicating You are attempt ing to create file filename appears e Initialize INed to the file and cursor position displayed the last time the user exited from INed If multiple windows were in use only the file in the last active window is displaye
246. on March 7 h Mail messages received on March 7 1990 h Document prepared on DATE Message send by FromTo Subject subject Total message follows below Message With the TEN PLUS editor it is possible to draw boxes as for diagrams in the middle of text Because these drawing characters are stored as control characters most printers need an IBM 8 bit code to print them However the TEN PLUS print helper has an 6 TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Release 2 2 5 option that converts these control characters into printable characters To use the IBM codes a sample filter is supplied called prtfilter This shell script is stored in the file usr lib INed bin As supplied it outputs line drawing characters from the IBM extended graphics character set It can be easily modified for compatibility with Epson or other printers It has been tested with several dot matrix printers in the IBM Graph ics Printer compatibility mode and with the HP LaserJet II in its default mode The printhelp file contains examples of how to use this filter 7 NEW TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS Three new terminal descriptions are provided in addition to the already existing description for the Wyse 60 terminal Wyse 60 terminals are available with different keyboard types If you set your TERM environment variable to wyse en wyse at or wyse as you can use TEN PLUS with any of the three most popular keyboards These are the Enhanced
247. one Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project You are attempting to create file usr larry report Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information Create an ASCII file without history Create a structured file with history Create a directory Re enter the file name usr larry INSERT Line Your options are to create an ASCII file a structured file or a directory or to re enter the file name in case you mistyped it For these exercises you will create ASCII files 5 With the cursor on Create an ASCII file without history use EXECUTE to create the new file A blank window will appear on the display The window is a view into the file and often displays only a portion of the text in the file The window indicates that you are in the INed text editor and may now enter or revise data in the file Since this file is empty the window is blank On most displays the window is 20 or 21 lines high by 78 charac ters wide approximately one third of an 11 inch page The cursor indicates the current position in the window On most displays it is represented by a blinking or solid box or a blinking or solid under line Keyboard input is implemented or displayed at the cursor 1 ASCII files store text and programs The computer treats the material in an ASCII file
248. ontains information about the structure of the data in the file and about any changes that have been made to the data A structured file contains hierarchical data that is displayed and edited using forms and may have multiple levels accessed via and ZOOM QUTI The top level is the first level displayed when a structured file is edited 2 ERROR MESSAGES Alternate file filename does not exist Cause You have used to switch to the alternate file but the alternate file does not exist It may have been removed or renamed or you may never have defined an alternate file Action Use ENTER filename to switch to an existing file Cannot backup file filename Cause You have used filename SAVE This involves creating a backup copy of the file Due to operating system problems this is impossible Usu ally this means that you do not have write permission in the current directory The file will not be saved Action Change the access permissions or ask your system administrator to solve the operating system problem then try SAVE again a TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 49 Cannot create directory directory Cause You have attempted to create directory this operation has failed possibly due to a lack of space Action Contact your system administrator Cannot create file filename Cause You have attempted to create a file via MENU but the editor cannot create the file or you have tried to
249. or In addition the list of error words may include correctly spelled words that are not in the system dictionary for example a person s last name Thus the entries in the output file are not necessarily misspelled words The spell program can be run using Execute UNIX shell commands or Run a shell command in a box from the New Task Menu as described in 5 13 or it can be run using ENTER and MENU To run spell using and MENU 102 2 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Use ENTER Type spell filename gt typofile where filename is the name of the file being checked and typofile is the name of the file in which possible errors will be written If typofile does not already exist it is created If typofile does exist its existing contents are deleted before anything is written If differentiation between words not on the list and words with plausible derivatives is desired the v option should be specified before filename in the spell command spell v filename gt typofile Use not DO Check the spelling in a file called test and output the errors to a file called typos ly 2 Use ENTER Type spell test gt typos then use MENU The sys tem confirms that the command is being executed by display ing the message Executing spell test gt typos in a popup box The message No output from spell test gt typos appears in the popup box when the program is finished run ning Use CANCEL
250. or more lines of blank space move lines or copy lines use this same pro cedure substituting INSERT PICK UP or PICK COPY respec tively for DELETE The message x xBOX LINEx x x appears at the bottom of the screen when cursor defining is in progress The text defined by a vertical cursor motion includes the line from the initial cursor posi tion up to and including the last line on which the cursor is posi tioned On some displays the defined lines are highlighted Use PAGE PAGE LINE and 85 2 with the cursor positioning functions after using to define a set of lines spanning more than one screenful of text When indicating a cursor defined argument and cannot immediately follow because this sequence has another interpretation 85 2 and can be used after PAGE PAGE Or a cursor positioning function has been issued 8 2 2 Designating Blocks A cursor defined block is a portion of the window defined on the screen using the cursor positioning functions as the argument to BOX MARK To designate a block of text use INSERT DELETE PICK UP or 87 2 87 19 87 3 87 7 along with the cursor positioning functions The cursor can be moved vertically and horizontally to define a block Moving the cursor horizontally across columns defines an area of text that can be opened deleted moved or picked up If the area is opened or if TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 29 a picked up ar
251. ormat of the error messages produced by that compiler Developers who use the LPI ANSI C compiler should use CoEdit instead The C Helper is described in more detail in the TEN PLUS Tutorial in this guide 5 2 New Filters The TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 5 includes some new filters that are particularly useful to C programmers The new filters are box unbox space unspace indent undent tab and untab The box and unbox filters can be used to put C style comments around text and remove it again For example suppose you have the following text in your file for i 0 i lt total i printf 7d values i if i 1 10 0 printf in Position the cursor on the line that contains the word for Press the ENTER key type the word box then use DO The text will now look something like this LHRH EEE EERE HEHEHE EERE EEE EEE HEE for i 0 i lt total i printf X7d values i if i 1 10 0 printf in LHRH EERE AE AE AE AE GE AE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE E AE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE GE AE GE GE GE E E E AE E E E S Refer to filters 1 for more information about these filters TEN PLUS User Interface Release Notes Release 2 2 5 5 6 NEW UTILITIES FOR STRUCTURED FILES The TEN PLUS environment particularly the TEN PLUS Mail Sys tem makes use of TEN PLUS structured files These are index sequential files rather than str
252. ory 5 search paths editor 8 search paths establishing editor 9 shell variable 4 11 shell variable denoting 4 11 standard input redirection 4 storing deleted files and directories 14 synchronizing directory listing 14 SYS 4 user prompt 4 11 variable denoting a shell 11 variable environment 11 12 variable names special 4 variable shell 4 11 watch files 7 watch files establishing 7 wild cards 15 TEN PLUS User Interface Manual Entries CONTENTS catsf 1 e 1 fc 1 ffill 1 filters 1 ghost 1 history 1 newfile 1 prtsf 1 prtty 1 readfile 1 rmhist 1 rpl 1 sortsf 1 tconvert 1 tdigest 1 versions 1 ined 4 terms 4 catsf 1 Base catsf 1 NAME catsf concatenate structured files SYNOPSIS catsf c criteria rn s files outputfile DESCRIPTION BUGS The catsf utility catenates together all the records of files and writes the results in to outputfile It can be used to combine structured files No input file may be the same as the output file The option criteria selects which records to write if no criteria are given all records are selected If the c option is given alone catsf reads the standard input for the criteria If the r option is used only the record number specified by n is selected The s option causes catsf to be silent about nonexistent files The criteria option can contain expressions in the following form criteri
253. ource file and all ASCII files including the Makefile Correct any errors Use options 2 goto next com piler error and 3 goto first compiler error to move to the places in your file where the compiler caught errors The use of ENTER with these options reverses their meaning so that 3 goes to the last compiler error and 2 goes to the previous compiler error The helper moves the cursor to the line with an error and displays the error message in a popup box When you use these options the C Programming Helper looks at the error list in the temporary file this file is displayed by using option 4 show compiler output Use option 7 show matching parenthesis to check for matching delimiters To use this option move the cursor to either a parenthesis or a bracket or or a brace or then use 7 The helper either moves the cursor to the matching delimiter or if a matching delimiter is not found displays an error message If necessary recompile using option 1 When the program compiles without errors a o file is created e g code o Use option 6 run make The helper asks you in a popup box which target program to make You can either type in the target s name and EXECUTE or accept the default target TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 95 name displayed in parentheses To accept the default without entering a target name The initial default is the current source code name without th
254. pup box Use CANCEL to remove the box Read or send mail Displays your mailbox if the TEN PLUS Mail System is available on your computer Show your profiles directory Displays your profiles directory so you can view or edit your TEN PLUS profiles Edit your editor profile Displays your editor profile which is used to customize your editing environment Refer to TEN PLUS Profiles in this guide for information about changing your editor profile Housekeep Removes all versions of files except the current version You must use Housekeep periodically say once a day to prevent various files from growing too large and wasting storage space Display history of current file Displays a list of all versions of the current file To select an option from this or any other menu position the cursor on the desired option and use EXECUTE or use any of the func tions 1 through 8 depending on the number that corresponds to the line on which your choice is listed For example to select Show your profiles directory from the default New Task Menu use 4 since this is the fourth option on the menu Use to remove a menu from the display Using LOCAL MENU is similar to MENU except that it displays a menu of options that apply specifically to the type of information or to the application you are using at the moment Refer to the TEN PLUS Tutorial in this guide or to the appropriate 20 TEN PLUS Primer
255. r Move cursor and EXECUTE to select CANCEL or HELP Print on default printer Print ask for options Print to file overwrite Print to file append usr larry INSERT Line 3 Select the desired print option Standard print options are described below Print on default printer Causes the file or directory to be printed on the printer assigned to your work station Page numbers and the file name are printed at the top of each page and the title on the header page is set to the name of the current file Each work sta tion should have an assigned default printer Print ask for options Pipes the PRINT output through the print com mand for your system sets the title on the header 104 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 page to the name of the current file and prompts you for print options Print to file overwrite Prompts for a file name and overwrites the specified file with the output Print to file append Prompts for a file name and writes the output to the end of the specified file If you wish to modify or add to the default options on your print menu you must copy the system print profile printprf into your profiles directory and edit it The system printprf file is located in the SYS profiles directory For more infor mation about modifying your printprf file refer to TEN PLUS Profiles 8 8 Splitting a File Sometimes it is helpful to split a lengthy document into two or more shorte
256. r that negative numbers can be used as string arguments for example you can use ENTER 5 SEARCH Action Specify positive numeric arguments to commands No alternate file Cause You have used to switch to an alternate file but there is no alternate file because the current file is the first one to be edited in this session Action Use ENTER filename to switch to a specific file No file name on current line Cause You have used on a blank line in the File Manager display Action Move the cursor to a line containing a file name before using ZOOM IN j No filter string set Cause You have used DO expecting to rerun the last filter but no previous filter string has been set Action Use ENTER argument DO No margins allowed in list fields Cause You have used while in a field with a tree data path that is a list field Margins are not allowed in fields with tree data paths Action No action required No margins allowed in one line fields Cause You have tried to set margins in a one line field Margins are not allowed in one line fields Action No action required No output from program Cause You have tried to run a program or command using ENTER program MENU The program produced no output 58 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Action No action required No previous item inthis list Cause You have used PREVIOUS while looking at the first item in a li
257. r Interface 1 Release 2 2 prtsf 1 Base prtsf 1 in any part of the path This means that the prtsf program can be used on any type of structured data provided that all records in the data file have similar children For example the entire message field could be printed by message In order to deal with long path names the format files have an alias mechanism An alias line is one that begins with a pound sign in column one an a in column two one or more spaces followed by an alias and followed by one or more spaces and a path name The fol lowing example would print all lines of the message field a mess message mess All lines with a pound sign in column 1 immediately followed by a blank are ignored thus comments may be put into a format this is a comment There is also a mechanism for printing header and footer information once per file Lines beginning with h are header lines and are printed beginning with the character after the blank before any records are processed Lines beginning with f are footer lines and are printed after all records have been processed h File FNAMEJ f End of messages for file FNAME In addition to the headers that can be printed once per file there are grand headers that can be printed once per invocation Lines begin ning with gh are grand header lines and are printed starting with the character after the blank before any files are
258. r blocks of text for copying inserting or deleting Can be used with cursor positioning and other TEN PLUS functions such as PICK UP PICK COPY INSERT and DELETE BREAK Stops SEARCH and SEARCH CANCEL Removes an error message or popup box from the display oN Centers the current line between the current margins DELETE Deletes the current line The deleted line can be restored with RESTORE DELETE CHARACTER Deletes the character at the current cursor position END LINE Moves the cursor one space to the right of the rightmost character of the current line ENTER Enhances or modifies many TEN PLUS functions such as PICK COPY INSERT For example ENTER 5 PICK UP picks CR up five successive lines of text The TEN PLUS Tutorial in this guide describes all the capabilities of ENTER 28 EXECUTE EXIT FUNCTIONS GO TO INSERT MODE M m ie TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 Invokes options that appear in menus or help popup boxes Cursor positioning functions are used to place the cursor at the option to be EXECUTE d Exits from the TEN PLUS environment saving all changes made to files during this editing session or since the last SAVE Displays a menu showing which of the ten basic TEN PLUS functions are active and allows you to select one Displays the beginning of the file and posi tions the cursor on the first line If the cursor is already on the
259. r documents The shorter files can then be edited by more than one person and joined together when editing is complete The split 1 command splits the original file and creates new tem porary files with aa ab ac and so on appended to each new file name If a new file name is not designated the system assigns the file name x The split program can be run using Execute UNIX shell commands or Run a shell command in a box from the New Task Menu as described in 85 13 or it can be run using ENTER To split a file using ENTER l Determine the number of lines each new file should contain and choose a new file name to be used for the split files One way to determine the number of lines the new files should con tain is to access the original file and use to move to the end of the file Note the number of lines in the document and divide that number by the number of temporary files the document is to be split into This will result in new files of approximately equal length when the sp it command is issued 2 Use ENTER TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 105 3 Type split n filename newfilename where n is the number of lines each file should contain filename is the name of the original file and newfilename is the name to be used for the new split files 4 Use MENU After a brief pause the message No output from split n filename newfilename appears in a popup box Use CANCEL to remove the popup box Whe
260. r editor profile If that is all you want to do for now you can proceed to 2 4 The first field on the MENU Options screen Description shown in menu contains the text that will appear in the New Task Menu The next field Type determines what kind of task is to be performed when this option is selected Possible Type entries are form change to a new form file change to a new file helper change to a new helper 4 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 screen clear the screen and run a program popbox run a program and put its output in a popup box The last field on the MENU Options screen Name of file or progran contains the name of the file helper or program This field can contain shell variables and user prompts A shell variable is denoted by typing a dollar sign followed by the variable name The editor also understands these special variable names FORM the name of the current form FILE the name of the file you are editing SALTFILE the name of the alternate file HELEER the name of the current helper SYS the directory where editor helpers forms and help files are installed LANG the directory in which a foreign language version of forms help messages and scripts can be found If the Type is screen or popbox the last field is passed to the shell for processing This means that the command can actually be a pipeline several programs separated by the pipe character 1 It can
261. rd is not changed and the editing ses sion can continue The edited file or record is saved again upon exiting the TEN PLUS environment if it is modified after the SAVE When editing ASCII files or structured nontext files with large records it is advisable to periodically ENTER filename SAVE saves the current image of the file being edited and then copies the file into filename The editor renames the overwritten file to include a bak suffix 18 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 7 INTERACTIVE TEXT EDITING FUNCTIONS The INed command language consists of cursor movements func tions and arguments The first element of the INed command language is the cursor position The cursor is a pointer to where the next typed character will appear Most editing functions are per formed at the position or line indicated by the cursor Cursor positioning functions are described in 5 1 Functions perform designated operations and are the second element of the INed command language For example deletes the line of text at the cursor position Editing functions are described in this section and text processing functions are described in 9 Arguments described in 8 are the third element of the INed com mand language Arguments modify function defaults This section explains the various INed editing functions The effect of each function is summarized in Appendix A DO FORMAT MARGIN CENTER and FONT which are use
262. rectangular area of text that includes partial lines such as columns text in the cursor column and to the right is displaced Refer to 4 16 for more information about using to define columns Some displays highlight the text being defined oth ers only indicate where the definition begins and ends Use PICK UP The text is removed and the cursor returns to its original position Move the cursor to a new location and use PUT DOWN The text is removed from the pick buffer and inserted at the cursor location Practice moving text using BOX MARK l With the cursor at the beginning of the third line use BOX MARK Note that the defined area begins with the line on which the cursor is initially positioned Use to move the cursor four lines down to the blank line then use PICK UP The five lines are removed TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 37 1 t t t Preliminary report by Pat I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a
263. report 64 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 5 8 Alternate Methods of Changing Directories So far you have used ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT to change direc tories There are however alternate methods for doing this 5 8 1 Full and Relative Path Names You can move from one directory to another with path name USE A path name that does not begin with a is called a relative path name and tells the system to search downward from your current directory You can give the system a relative path name if the target directory is on a direct path below your current directory For example the quiksell directory is in your home directory and is therefore on a path below your home directory 1 In your home directory use ENTER and type the directory name quiksell 2 Use USE the File Manager display for the quiksell directory will appear on your screen In this example you have given the path name of the target direc tory relative to your location within the directory structure that is a path name that does not begin with a A full path name begins with a and tells the system to begin its search from the root directory To access a directory above your current directory use the full path name to the target directory For example to move from the quikse11 directory to the home directory of user2 in the above diagram you should provide the system with the full path name to user 2 s home directory This is necessary beca
264. ries is the current directory in this case your home directory larry A path name is the sequence of directories from the root directory to the file or directory you wish to reference The diagram below illustrates how a directory structure is configured each directory is indicated by a T Only the files in the directory usr larry are shown TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 67 Level 1 i Level 2 bin etc Level 3 larry user user3 Level 4 1988 cal mesg phone policies report The diagram illustrates how the path name of a directory identifies that directory s placement in the directory structure As you create and delete files and directories your directory structure will change to reflect the additions and deletions that you make You can ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT to move around the directory struc ture 1 ZOOM OUT to the directory above your home directory INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description Larry s Home Directory User2 s Home Directory User3 s Home Directory INSERT Line 2 Practice using and ZOOM OUT to explore the directory structure If you get lost you can always return to your home directory via the Show home directory MENU option discussed in 82 3 5 5 Creating Directories So far you have worked on files in your home directory Now you will create a subdirectory to contain files for a particular project 1
265. rmation for an alphabetic listing of the TEN PLUS functions and the keystroke sequences required for your keyboard 2 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 2 THE EDITOR PROFILE The editor profile file editorprf is used to customize the editor to suit the needs of individual users It is used to override the default specifications in the standard editor profile intended for beginning users The editor profile is used to specify e What the menu for will look like e What the menu for will look like e Which files the editor should watch e Which directories the editor should search to locate forms helpers messages and forms language scripts On versions of the TEN PLUS system that support color displays an option is available that allows users to specify the colors used for text and background 2 1 Creating Your Editor Profile To create your editor profile file use and select the option Edit your editor profile Popup boxes will appear indi cating that the system is creating a profiles directory if one does not already exist and a standard editor profile file editorprf in that directory After a brief pause the top level of the editorprf file will appear on the display 2 2 The Top Level of the Editor Profile The top level of the editor profile looks like this Editor Profile File This file allows you to modify the behavior of the editor to suit your preferences Put the cursor on the line of interest and ZOOM IN
266. rminal types available TEN PLUS User Interface Installation Release 2 2 5 on your system If you are not using one of the supported termi nals you must contact your vendor to determine how you can update your system to include a correct terminal description Here are the terminal types supported by the TEN PLUS User Interface Use this table to determine the correct TERM variable for your system Variable default Terminal Type Typical dumb terminals DEC VT100 vt100 DEC VT220 vt220 DEC VT240 vt240 IBM 3101 ibm3101 AT amp T 5425 5425 AT amp T 4425 4425 Esprit 6310 esp6310 IBM AT or compatible atcon or AT386 WYSE 60 wyse60 If several different terminal types are attached to your system each user can define an appropriate TERM variable There are two ways to define a TERM variable You may assign a value for the current login session or you may set it permanently by modifying a user s profile file For example if you are using a VT100 terminal and want to set the TERM variable for the current login sessin only type the following commands at the system prompt TERM vt100 export TERM If you want to set the TERM variable permanently edit the file profile located in your HOME directory to include these lines TERM vt 100 export TERM To initialize the new terminal type log out of the system then log back in again dia NOTES INTERACTIVE DOC0116 2Z
267. rogramming Helper The C Programming Helper provides seven options to facilitate compiling and making C programs The options displayed by using LOCAL MENU for the C Helper are 1 compile current file 2 goto next compiler error 3 goto first compiler error 4 show compiler output 5 show C program 6 run make 7 show matching parenthesis To exercise these options you can either use LOCAL MENU or use one of the functions 1 through i e using function 1 com piles the current file You might want to use LOCAL MENU until you are familiar with these options and their associated functions 94 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Using these options you can compile the current file view compiler errors and the compiler output run make switch between the tem porary compiler output file and the C source file and check for matching delimiters The following is a summary of the use of the C Helper to compile source code l Create a file with the c extension such as code c This file can have either a structured or ASCII file type Enter code into code c Compile code c using option 1 compile current file You can stop the process at any time with BREAK To see the output and diagnostics use option 4 show compiler output This puts you in a temporary file that contains the compiler output this file is removed when you exit the editor Before compiling the code the helper saves the s
268. rol feature make sure that you are running the C shell and that a suspendcharacter is set By convention the suspendcharacter is often set to be z To set the suspendcharacter to be z in the TEN PLUS User Interface type sity Ta To move a foreground process to the background simply type CTRL z For example to temporarily interrupt a TEN PLUS editor session type z The TEN PLUS editor will clear the screen and the C shell prompt will appear To return to the TEN PLUS editing session use the C shell g command The TEN PLUS editor will reappear exactly as you left it 3 NEW OPTION AND XPCTERM SUPPORT A PC terminal emulator program called xpcterm is a part of the INTERACTIVE X11 product that allows users to run text based applications such as the TEN PLUS environment in an X window When TEN PLUS is used in an xpcterm window the editor recognizes the size of the window in columns and lines This means that the editor session window will have the exact same size and shape as that of the window it is running in When a window size is changed the window size of the TEN PLUS editing session can be readjusted by using the new command A new command line option ar has been introduced to make this readjustment happen automatically If this option is used when the TEN PLUS editor is invoked the editor ses sion window will automatically adapt itself to the new window size each time it is changed The same comman
269. rovide additional information about using MENU You can also use any of the functions 1 through 8 depending on the number that corresponds to the line on which your choice is listed For example to select Show your profiles directory from the default New Task Menu use 4 since this 1s the fourth option on the menu If MENU is accidentally used to run an interactive command one requiring additional input from the user BREAK can sometimes be used to interrupt the process 6 4 Removing Boxes CANCEL Four types of boxes can appear in the window during an editing ses sion menus error messages instructions and informative messages The last type disappears after a few seconds but the first three must be removed explicitly with CANCEL Occasionally the system needs additional information from the user before a command can be executed In these situations EXECUTE is used to send the requested information to the system and CANCEL is used to cancel the operation and return to the editing session 6 5 Controlling Detail ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT There are certain situations in which it is desirable to focus in on a specific item displayed on the screen For example while viewing a structured file 2 2 such as the editor profile file it is often necessary to see additional data related to a specific item in the win dow Additional detail is displayed by moving the cursor to the item and using ZOOM
270. rsor expands to occupy the entire screen 7 14 Changing Windows NEXT WINDOW NEXT WINDOW is used when the screen contains multiple editing windows It activates the next window in order of creation as the current editing window ENTER NEXT WINDOW activates the next window in the inverse order of creation 24 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 An alternate way of changing windows is to move the cursor through the window boundary into an adjacent window With this approach however the window change does not take effect until an editing function is used 7 15 Setting and Clearing Tabs SET TAB Tabs are initially set to the system default which is every eighth column in the file Changes to tab settings are valid only for the current editing session Each file used in an editing session has its own tab stops SET TAB sets a tab stop at the cursor column ENTER SET TAB clears any tab stops at the cursor column 7 16 Editing Wide Lines RIGHT and LEFT and are used when editing lines that are wider than the window moves the window to the right one third of the window or to the right hand margin of the file whichever is closer moves the window to the left one third of the win dow or to the left hand margin of the file whichever is closer The cursor remains on the line it occupied prior to the move If the ori ginal cursor column is still on the display the cursor remains there If the column moves off t
271. ructured files It displays a form detailing infor mation about previous changes to a file and allows the user to view and or copy any previous version The History Display uses menus and forms to implement its functions History Display functions are accessed by positioning the cursor at the desired option on the menu or form and using a function Like the File Manager it does not require knowledge of any specific commands C Helper The TEN PLUS C Helper allows a programmer to develop compile and test C programs It uses the make utility and will only func tion properly if the INTERACTIVE Software Development System is installed FOR MORE INFORMATION The TEN PLUS User Interface is supported by a complete set of documentation For a complete listing of all documentation that relates to the INTERACTIVE UNIX Operating System refer to the Documentation Roadmap included in the INTERACTIVE UNIX System V 386 Release 3 2 Operating System Guide eat TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 5 Release Notes CONTENTS INTRODUCTION SUPPORT FOR JOB CONTROL NEW OPTION AND XPCTERM SUPPORT NEW TEN PLUS FORMS FEATURES 4 TEN PLUS Forms SUE 4 2 Forms Compiler 4 3 Support for Large Screehis NEW ENVIRONMENT FOR C PROGRAMMERS 5 1 C Programming d 5 2 New Filters NEW UTILITIES FOR STRUCTURED FILES 7 NEW TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS TRANSLATABLE HELP MESSAGE FILES WWWwwW N nn tn FHA TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 5
272. run in popup boxes If you accidentally enter an interactive command try using to stop the command from executing The date command is just one example of a command that can be executed from the editor sub shell or in a popup box For a complete listing of system com mands see your user s manual 5 12 3 Showing Your Profiles Directory The TEN PLUS User Interface includes three profiles that you can use to customize the TEN PLUS environment to suit your particular needs Custom versions of the TEN PLUS profiles must be stored in a profiles directory in your home directory The Show your profiles directory option moves you from a file or another directory to your profiles directory If your home directory does not already contain a profiles directory it will be created 5 12 4 Editing Your Editor Profile The editor profile editorprf is a standard profile intended for beginning users The TEN PLUS editorprf file lets you specify what the New Task Menu will look like what the Help Menu will look like which files the editor should watch and what the TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 79 editor search paths should be Use the Edit your editor profile option to customize your editorprf to suit your needs If this file does not already exist it will be created If a profiles directory does not already exist in your home direc tory it will be created as well The top level of the editorprf file looks like this Editor Profile File
273. s by selecting the File Manager local menu option 2 Display all files 82 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 6 THE HISTORY DISPLAY The TEN PLUS system makes use of helpers to perform specific computations on data that has been stored with a predefined struc ture The structure of data used by a helper is defined by a form associated with the data whenever it is saved or retrieved The TEN PLUS History Display helper provides a way to inspect the history of a structured file You can use this helper to determine details about the changes made to the file and you can recreate ver sions of the file as needed for the History Display allows you to copy a previous version to a new file for further editing 6 1 Types of INed Files The INed editor can edit two types of files ASCII and structured All TEN PLUS files are either ordinary ASCII files or structured files An ASCII file is composed of a sequence of ordinary text characters A structured file reflects a specific data structure defined by an asso ciated form and it keeps a record of changes that have been made to the file This record is called the history of the file A structured file automatically saves versions of the file between its original crea tion and the time that it is ultimately deleted Although you cannot use some system commands directly with structured files you can convert the files to ASCII if necessary See readfile 1 for more information about conv
274. s deleted and put into the wastebasket buffer Use to recover text stored in the wastebasket buffer Later in this tutorial you will use this procedure in conjunction with PICK UP and to move paragraphs and you will use PICK COPY and PUT DOWN to duplicate paragraphs Practice using BOX MARK to delete text 40 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 1 Move the cursor to the beginning of line 34 and use BOX MAREK 2 Use to move the cursor four lines down to the next blank line and use DELETE The paragraph is deleted 4 11 Defining Nonrectangular Areas Using TEXT MARK A different method of cursor defining is used to insert delete or copy nonrectangular areas of text This method is usually used on sentences but can also be used on words or lines Note that you can use CANCEL or ENTER to cancel a TEXT MARK sequence at any time before completion To cursor define and move a nonrectangular area 1 Position the cursor at the beginning of the area to be defined and use TEXT MARK A display dependent indicator appears at the cursor position and TEXT x x xx appears below the window on the left hand side of the display whenever TEXT MARK is used 2 Use the cursor positioning functions to define the area to be affected Use or press the key to define full lines and TAB or to define partial lines When partial lines are defined the character at the final cursor posi tion i
275. s font if this font is available on your display Switches between two fonts Centers the cursor line between the margins 1 Centers the defined text between the margins n Centers a specific number of lines starting with the cursor line INSERT MODE Switches between insert mode and overwrite mode When insert mode is on insertion of text is allowed text to the right of the insertion moves to the right When overwrite mode is on text can be deleted by striking over it DELETE CHARACTER Deletes the character at the cursor position ENTER DELETE CHARACTER Deletes the portion of a line at and to the right of the current cursor position INSERT Creates one blank line at the cursor position by moving the cursor line and all succeeding lines down ENTER n INSERT Creates the specified number of blank lines immediately below the cursor line BOX MARK Creates a blank space equal to the number of defined lines moving text at the cursor position down BOX MARK 1 INSERT Creates a rectangular area of blank space ENTER INSERT Moves text at and to the right of the cursor to the new line below TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 113 PICK UP Deletes text and adds it to the pick buffer ENTER n PICK UP Deletes the specified number of lines and adds them to the pick buffer BOX MARK 1 PICK UP Deletes all of the defined lines and adds them to the pick buffer TEXT MARK 1
276. s not part of the defined area Some displays highlight the text being defined others only indicate where the definition begins and ends 3 Use PICK UP The text is removed and the cursor returns to its original position 4 Move the cursor to the insertion location and use PUT DOWN The text is removed from the pick buffer and inserted at the cursor location Text at and to the right of the cursor position is moved right Practice using TEXT MARK to move a nonrectangular area 1 With the cursor on line 36 position the cursor at the P in Pat and use TEXT MARK 2 Press the ENTER key then use to move the cursor to the AinAre 3 Use PPICK UP The sentence is removed and the text that was previously located after the sentence moves to the cursor TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 41 position Notice that line 36 extends beyond the right hand window margin 4 Use FORMAT to readjust the text Position the cursor on line 37 three spaces after the question mark and use PUT DOWN The text is removed from the wastebasket buffer and is inserted in the file 4 12 Deleting or Moving Sentences Using TEXT MARK When deleting or moving text areas that include both full and par tial lines the fastest and most efficient way to cursor define the area is to use TEXT MARK The procedure for deleting or moving a block of text is 1 Position the cursor on the first character to be deleted or moved and use
277. s on a file or directory by typ ing over the existing permissions at this level or you can use LOCAL MENU to move to a more detailed level the Detailed File Status Information display 3 With the cursor on the line describing the report file use LOCAL MENU 72 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS System To see detailed file status information select an item and ZOOM IN File Name T Owner Size Modification Date Permissions 16 46 08 17 05 38 10 49 42 12 48 51 12 04 34 12 04 34 1988 cal r larry mesg larry phone r larry File Manager Select a menu option for example move the cursor to an item and EXECUTE otherwise CANCEL to remove the menu or HELP to display help information 1 Display visible files 2 Display all files 3 Return to normal directory display Show details about files 5 Show more details about this file ZOOMIN Show more details about this file usr larry INSERT Line Note that the third and sixth options are now available 4 Select 5 Show more details about this file or ZOOMIN Show more details about this file Detailed File Status Information Full path name usr larry report File Size in Bytes 2488 File Size in Blocks 5 File Type Ordinary Number of Links 1 Inode 2053 Directory ID 2 10 Device ID N A Description Ownership Owner of the file larry Uid 229 Group of the file staff Gid Other r Save
278. s taking orders and checks as fast as he can usr larry report INSERT Line 3 On the fifth line of the file position the cursor at the space just after the t in past and use DELETE CHARACTER to remove not so reliable either Note that strings can be removed more quickly when DELETE CHARACTER is held down TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 27 4 2 Adding Characters or Words Within a Line When a file is opened the editor is in insert mode The system informs you of this by displaying INSERT below the window When the editor is in insert mode all input is inserted at the cursor position and existing text is moved to the right or wrapped onto the next line To add characters or words within a line without over striking characters use insert mode If the right hand margin has been removed word wrap is off and the editor is in insert mode a line of text can extend beyond the right hand window border You can view the part of the line that has moved off the display by using to move the window If there is a right hand margin word wrap is on and the editor is in insert mode the text wraps at the margin Use as required to reformat the text within each paragraph according to the margins set on the display When insert mode is in effect you can correct typing errors by typ ing the correct characters and using to remove the incorrect ones You may prefer to keep insert mode in effect throughout revision l Are wor
279. sage Saving file pathname filename displays in a popup box when SAVE is used When the popup box disappears file editing can resume TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 107 8 12 Removing Line Noise Characters and Broadcast Messages Occasionally the system prints warning messages in the editor win dow or displays characters not keyed in the file When this occurs use REFRESH When is used the window goes blank for a few seconds and then previous text is rewritten exactly as it was prior to the interference When is completed the cursor returns to the position it occupied before the display was cleared 8 13 Using Wildcards The is a wildcard character that matches any string of characters It saves typing and makes it possible to name groups of files as arguments to a UNIX System command When typing a command that applies to several files use the to denote zero one or more characters that appear in all the file names rather than typing the name of each file For example the can be used with s 1 ls lists all files within a directory ls intro lists all files whose names begin with the characters intro ls bak lists all files whose names end with the characters bak Another wildcard is which represents exactly one character For example 1s h t lists all three letter files within a directory that begin with an h and end with a t so that files named hat hot and hit are listed
280. se to remove the popup box containing the modification time of the current version Options 2 and 3 show the next or previous versions of a file respectively Option 4 allows you to move from a version of a file back to the History of file form Option 5 allows you to save a previous version of a file This is necessary if you need to edit a previous version In order to edit a version you must save it under another name or make it the current version 88 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 1 Use LOCAL MENU and select 5 save current version of file Enter file name usr larry quiksell sample QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY Software tools for the sales industry that provide a revolutionary approach to sales from the QuikSell Corporation HISTORY MODE INSERT 2 To save a copy of this version under a new file name type the new name in the space provided Enter file name usr larry quiksell sample sample2 QUIKSELL MAKES THE HARD SELL EASY Software tools for the sales industry that provide a revolutionary approach to sales from the QuikSell Corporation HISTORY MODE INSERT Line 3 Use EXECUTE The new file samp1e2 consists of just one version It will have no history until changes are made to it The old sample file retains all of its history 4 You can also save this version under the original file name To do this simply use without typing
281. sing 15 initializing a file 6 initializing INed 4 initializing TEN PLUS system 4 AEN INSERT 18 25 28 INSERT cursor defined 19 insert mode 18 20 INSERT MODE 18 27 inserting a character 18 inserting a control character 24 inserting a line 18 inserting an area 18 interrupting MENU commands 15 interrupting search filter 14 joining lines 19 LAST ARG 27 leading spaces in text files 36 LEFT 13 24 29 limitations 36 LINE 12 LINE 28 29 line copying 28 line deleting 28 line deleting remainder of 20 line duplicating 20 line inserting 18 line moving 19 28 line moving to specified 22 line splitting 18 19 m LINE FEED 11 lines editing wide 24 lines joining 19 LOCAL MENU 9 16 LOCAL MENU using 16 LOCAL MENU 10 25 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 67 MARGIN 28 32 margin changes 33 margins resetting 32 margins setting 32 MENU 14 25 MENU commands interrupting 15 menu local 16 MENU options 14 MENU using 15 modes changing 18 moving a directory 9 moving a file 7 moving a line 19 28 moving a sentence 29 moving an area 19 moving text between files 21 moving to beginning of file 23 moving to end of file 23 moving to specified line 22 newfile 43 new line characters in text files 36 NEXT 16 NEXT WINDOW 23 numeric arguments with ENTER 27 opening a sentence 29 opening lines 28 opening lines and areas 18 operating system accessing 14 overwrite mode 18 20 PAGE 12
282. sking you to give the copy a new name This is because two files in the same directory cannot have the same name Type a new file name for example form 1tr2 in the popup box and use EXECUTE Using FORMAT and INSERT Two other basic TEN PLUS functions are and INSERT They are used to format text between the current margins and to insert space for new text Create the file memo in your practice directory then enter the text as shown I wanted to solicit your thoughts about the possibility of Lisa attending the Sales Conference next week I know that she s working on getting the display materials ready for the TransCorp presentation next month but if you could spare her I think it would be a valuable experience for her internship and an asset to us if we hire her upon graduation One of the problems with a lot of MBAs when they get out of school is that they don t have a good feel for the personal side of business I think it would be good for Lisa to get some of this exposure What do you think Will the TransCorp schedule permit usr larry practice memo INSERT The body of this example can be split into two paragraphs to make it more readable Move the cursor to the O in the word One on the fifth line of the paragraph then use the space bar until the phrase One of the has been moved to the next line 16 TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 I wanted to solicit your thoughts about the possibility of Lisa atten
283. sor at the I on the third line and split the line by using ENTER INSERT The part of the line beginning with I moves to the next line and the cursor is located one space after the comma 1 t t t Preliminary report by Pat As you can see I got the hang of the system in just a few short hours It is so easy to use I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past I can already tell that this system will speed things up immensely I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a usr larry report INSERT Line 3 5 Type so far things are going very well 6 On the second line use ENTER 5 INSERT Five lines are inserted at the cursor position and the other lines in the file are moved down TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 35 7 Use ENTER 5 PICK UP to remove the five lines and move the rest of the lines in the
284. specified by X Permissible values for X FUNCTION Action of Action of Action of ENTER X FUNCTION Action of FUNCTION ENTER FUNCTION X is any argument ENTER motion FUNCTION motion is a combination of cursor positioning functions DELETE Delete the character under the cur Delete from the cursor to the end of ERROR ERROR CHARACTER sor CCL DO Run last DO function exactly as it Print last DO function X is a command in the format n 1 ERROR was given prg Larg Replace n paragraphs or n lines if 1 appears by the result of running filter prg on that text with given args Old paragraphs are avail able with RESTORE END LINE Move the cursor to the last non Enter BOX LINE mode define a ERROR Continue defining argument space character of the current line region to the last nonspace character of the current line ENTER Begin accepting function argu Removes box Removes box Removes box ments ENTER Move the cursor to the beginning Enter BOX LINE mode move the cur ERROR Continue defining argument Key of the next line sor to the left end of the next line EXECUTE Select a menu item answer a ques No effect No effect ERROR tion in the affirmative EXIT Exit editor All altered files are ERROR ENTER q EXIT saves all structured Same as EXIT written to disk files and not ASCII files FONT Exchange current and alternate Save current font as alternate font set X is a string Save current font as ERROR
285. ss the report file 2 With the cursor on the third line of the file delete the words right away by positioning the cursor at the space before the r in right then using DELETE CHARACTER repeat edly until the words are removed and the period is at the cur sor position Note that the characters to the right of the cur sor move one space to the left for each character deleted Preliminary report by Pat As you can see I got the hang of the system It s so fast and easy I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past not so reliable either PS I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman i
286. st there are no items preceding the one you are viewing Action No action required No search string Cause You have used SEARCH or SEARCH expecting to search for a previously specified string but this is your first attempt to search Action Use ENTER string SEARCH or ENTER string SEARCH to specify a search string No space after line count in number Cause You have used ENTER number without specify ing a command or without inserting a space between number and the command for example ENTER 5sort DO Action Specify a command using ENTER number command for example ENTER 5 sort DO No windows to delete Cause You have used ENTER WINDOW to delete all but the current window But the current window is the only window Action No action required Output too large to fit here number lines Cause You have used EXECUTE It has generated more data than will fit into memory Action No action required Restarting the editor on file filename Cause The editor has detected a situation from which it can not recover It will attempt to restart itself Action No action required TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 59 Search failed on string string Cause There are no more occurrences of the search string in the file in the direction in which you were searching Action No action required Stopped by BREAK Cause You have used to stop a se
287. st 1 versions 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 prtsf 1 Base prtsf 1 NAME prtsf print the contents of a structured file SYNOPSIS prtsf f formatfile c criteria e string r files DESCRIPTION The prtsf utility is a simple report generator that prints information from a structured data file as created by the TEN PLUS editor on to the standard output Users can select the records from the file from which they want to print information and they can also choose how the document should look The criteria option selects the records to print if no criteria are given all records are selected If the c option is given alone prtsf reads the standard input for the criteria The formatfile specifies the contents and format of the output prtsf formats each selected record according to this specification and outputs the result If the f option is given alone prtsf reads the standard input for the format If no formatfile is given prtsf outputs the contents of the character nodes in the file one per line If the e option is used a form feed is output between each selected record s output If a string is given with the e option it is output along with a newline instead of the form feed If the r option is used only the record number specified by 7 is selected The formatfile is made up of invariant text which is output unchanged and field specifiers The format of the field spec
288. system Many of these functions can be modified or enhanced when used with other functions For detailed descriptions of these functions and of other functions available with the TEN PLUS system refer to the TEN PLUS Tutorial and to the TEN PLUS Reference Manual in this guide The Ten Basic Functions of the TEN PLUS System Displays a more detailed level of information N OOM OUT Displays a less detailed level of information Removes the current line and saves it until it is PUT DOWN PUT DOWN Inserts at the current cursor position the last line picked up PICK COPY Picks up a copy of the current line and moves the cursor down one line PUT COPY Inserts at the current cursor position a copy of the last line picked up Inserts a blank line at the current cursor position Formats the current paragraph within the current margins The previous unformat ted version of the paragraph is available with RESTORE Displays the New Task Menu z d L z S Z e Z E x a lt c gt 4 S lt LOCAL MENU Displays a menu of options specific to the current application or to the type of infor mation you are using TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 27 Some Additional TEN PLUS Functions may Move the cursor up down right or left N BACKSPACE Corrects typing errors by erasing characters BEGIN LINE Moves the cursor to the leftmost character of the current line BOX MARK Marks lines or rectangula
289. t on the left of the keyboard Alt t on the keyboard Alt u on the keyboard Alt w on the keyboard F9 on the function keypad F 10 on the function keypad 14 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 4 VT100 4 1 The VT100 Keyboard Figure 3 shows the VT100 keyboard layout and function locations for the TEN PLUS system If you are using TEN PLUS keycap covers it is not necessary to refer to 84 2 000o 002g Ear e Ss SENS NAVALI MSGR QR E fs EA EIIE FEE K fsa Sass A BETES DOE DECEM To invoke a function indicated by j hold down the CTRL key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by ___ hold down the CTRL and a keys simultaneously then release both and touch the designated key To invoke a function indicated by touch the ESC key then release it and touch the designated key Figure 3 VT100 Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System zZ aseajay uoreunuoju pseoghay SfYTd N3L SL 16 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 4 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the VT100 Keyboard Functions are accessed in one of four ways on a VT100 l Touch the defined key For example FORMAT is invoked by touching 7 on the numeric keypad Hold down the CTRL key then touch the defined key For example is invoked by holding down CTRL then touching the key Hold down the CTRL and a keys simultaneously release both then touch the desig
290. t INSERT Line 3 Position the cursor on the e in ext 25 then use BOX MAREK 4 Use to move the cursor to the last line in the list 5 Use to move the cursor across to the C in Consultant and use PICK COPY 6 Copy the column by positioning the cursor at the D in Director and using PUT DOWN cn TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 49 1 t t t t t t t t t r next few days to discuss all this Pat s ideas on the campaign seemed a bit odd to me We should meet with the following people before the end of the week Adams ext ext Director Larson ext ext Graphic Artist Pantages ext ext Consultant Sternig ext ext Marketing Manager Winkler ext ext Consultant Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it Seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I 11 begin working up some new copy for the campaign Should meet with the following people before the end of the week usr larry report INSERT Line 41 53 Note that when you define and PUT DOWN a rectangular area of text in this way text in the cursor column and to the right is displaced to the right Follow the same procedure using PICK UP and PUT DOWN to move the column or DELETE to remove the column It is also possible to INSERT a blank area within text by using the same procedure 7 Remove the second column by positioning the cursor at the e in the first occurren
291. t defined for this data Some applications define functions 1 through to perform operations specific to certain kinds of structured files Action Use LOCAL MENU to determine whether functions have been defined for the data you are editing Function not implemented Cause You have used a function that the editor does not recognize Action Use this manual to figure out the correct function and try again Helper error during restart Cause The application you are using did not restart correctly and currently is not functioning properly Action EXIT then try using the application again If the application does not work after exiting and reentering the file contact your system administrator Margin doesn t take a TEXTLINE region argument Cause You have tried to use TEXT MARK MARGIN to specify both the left and right margins simultaneously MARGIN does not work with TEXT MARK Action Use BOX MARK MARGIN to specify both margins at once Multiple windows are not implemented for non text files Cause You have used WINDOW while editing a structured data file WINDOW I can only be used with text files Action No action required Negative numeric argument not allowed Cause You have tried to provide a negative number as an argument to a function that accepts numeric argu ments Negative numeric arguments are not allowed TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 57 Note howeve
292. t identify the input file for each section Indicate that the next argument is to be the name of an output file to be used instead of the standard output This file can be the same as one of the input files in which case readfile backs up the contents of the input file in a bak file Silence messages that report unstructured and nonexistent files among arguments Illustrate the structure of the file with a tree diagram This option is ignored on structured text files and ASCII files Suppress buffering of output default buffer size is the size of the disk block Set to n columns the size of the increments and decrements in the indentation when printing a non text structured file The default value is five columns This option is meaningless when option t is specified The option must be separated from adja cent ones by spaces Begin reading file at the nth record This option must be separated from adjacent ones by spaces Prompts for syntax of usage Options can be combined and can appear in any order with the excep tions mentioned above SEE ALSO cat 1 newfile 1 TEN PLUS User Interface 1 Release 2 2 rmhist 1 Base rmhist 1 NAME rmhist remove history from INed structured files SYNOPSIS rmhist d f kn file DESCRIPTION Rmhist takes a list of file names and removes the history information from each file The files are backed up so that the old version of the file is
293. t the beginning of the search string that string is deleted X is a replace string If cursor is at the beginning of the search string it is replaced with the replace string RESTORE Place last deleted text at cursor ERROR position Note 4 Move window right one third of its width or to file boundary which ever is less Move window so that the column the cursor is in is the leftmost column X is positive Place X copies of last deleted text at cursor position X is positive Move window right X columns or to file boundary whichever is less Allow cursor defined region span vertical screen boundary 4 If buffer contains full lines CCL and following lines are pushed down to make room for inserted lines If buffer contains a rectangular area its contents are inserted with the upper left hand corner of the block at the cursor position the text to the right of the inserted material is pushed to the right ZZ eseejou jenueyy eoueJ9je SNTd NIL ly FUNCTION Action of Action of Action of ENTER X FUNCTION Action of FUNCTION ENTER FUNCTION X is any argument ENTER motion FUNCTION motion is a combination of cursor positioning functions Write current file out on disk if it Write current file out on disk if it has Write current file out on disk and copy ERROR has been modified since last SAVE been modified since last SAVE it into file named X TSEARCH Search forward or backward
294. t the current cursor position to the pick buffer ENTER n PICK COPY Adds a copy of the specified number of lines to the pick buffer BOX MARK 1 PICK COPY Adds a copy of the defined lines to the pick buffer TEXT MARK 1 PICK COPY Adds a copy of the defined area to the pick buffer TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 115 BOX MARK PICK COPY TEXT MARK PICK COPY Adds a copy of the defined portion of the line to the pick buffer BOX MARK 1 PICK COPY Adds a copy of a defined rectangular area to the pick buffer TEXT MARK RETURN PICK COPY Adds a copy of the defined area to the pick buffer PUT COPY Places a copy of the text most recently added to the pick buffer at the cursor position leaving it in the buffer string Puts string in the replace buffer If the string at the cursor position matches the string in the search buffer it is replaced with the string in the replace buffer REPLACE If the string at the cursor position matches the string in the search buffer it is replaced with the string in the replace buffer 6 MULTIPLE FILE WINDOW FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES USE Accesses the alternate file ENTER filename Makes filename the current file Filename may be an existing or a new file The current file becomes the alternate file WINDOW Makes a new window showing the current file ENTER filename WINDOW Creates a window and puts filename into that window Filename may be an exis
295. t this file Provides an alternate way to move to the Detailed File Status Information display for a particular file when you are viewing the file status information display 2 Select option 4 Show details about files A display showing details about the files and directories in your directory listing will appear TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 71 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS System To see detailed file status information select an item and ZOOM IN File Name T Owner Size Modification Date Permissions 1988 cal larry Mar 1988 16 46 rw r r mesg larry Mar 1988 17 05 rw r r phone larry Mar 1988 10 49 rw r r policies larry Mar 1988 12 48 rw r r quiksell larry Mar 1988 12 04 rwx r x r x report larry Mar 1988 10 25 rw r r usr larry INSERT Line This is a file status information display The fields in the display contain this information File Name Indicates the name of the file or directory T Indicates the type of the entry an r indicates a regular file and a d indicates a directory Owner Indicates the owner of the file or directory Size Indicates the size of the file or directory in bytes Modification Date Indicates the date and time the file or directory was last modified Permissions Indicates the permissions for owner group and others An r indicates read permission a w indi cates write permission and an x indicates execute permission You can change the permission
296. tails of MENU Option Description shown in menu Type Name of file or program Show home directory ie EOME Flags any non space character means true Sync and reopen file Save all files The Sync and reopen file box is used when a menu item alters a file in any way An entry in this box causes the system to save the file run the program and then reopen the file For exam ple to remove the history from the current file you could use the rmhist 1 command on the current file and type any character in the Sync and reopen file box 6 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 Details of MENU Option Description shown in menu Type Name of file or program Remove history from current file poses rmhist FILE Flags any non space character means true X Sync and reopen file x Save all files The Save all files box is used for saving all ASCII text files The editor maintains special files that track the changes made to ASCII text files and on exiting converts these special files back to regular ASCII files If you are running the shell using a menu item with the Type field set to screen you should set this flag by typing any character into the Save all files box This slows down the processing of the menu item if you have edited any ASCII text files but it is important when using the shell The Save all files flag ensures that if you run another program such as grep 1 from the shell on a text file that you h
297. te access and delete files and directories The directory you entered at login is called your home directory HOME the screen used to display a directory is called the File Manager display The File Manager display should be visible on your screen now If you are in a file ZOOM OUT to return to the File Manager display of your home directory INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it Description Calendar My Incoming Messages Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project usr larry INSERT Line 5 1 Copying Files Sometimes a duplicate of a file that already exists is needed Instead of retyping the text you may prefer to copy the original document The File Manager allows you to copy a file simply and easily using and PUT DOWN You can also copy multiple files using or motion with and PUT DOWN l Move the cursor to the line describing your report file and use PICK COPY The cursor will automatically move to the next line 2 Use PUT DOWN a popup box will appear TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 57 INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar mesg My Incoming Messages phone Company Telephone Book policies Company Policies report First Report on the QuikSell Project report First Report on the QuikSell Project
298. tem in just a few short hours It s easy I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past I can already tell that this system will speed things up immensely I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves something as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks usr larry report OVERWRITE Line 6 44 v gt 9 Use INSERT MODE to switch back into insert mode 4 4 Moving Windows If a right hand margin has not been set and words are inserted within a line the line often extends past the right hand window border Use to move the window to the right so that the text beyond the border is visible Use to move the window back to its original position File width can exceed the wid
299. ter your user identification has been received by the system you may be prompted for a password If you have been assigned a password type it at the Password prompt followed by ENTER The system will not display the password on the screen If you have not been assigned a password press ENTER if you see a Password prompt Your system may be installed so that an TEN PLUS screen will automatically appear when you log in If the system displays a prompt such as or when you log in access the TEN PLUS environment by typing e HOME followed by ENTER If you are still unable to enter the TEN PLUS environment ask the person responsible for installing the system to help you Place your keyboard template in a convenient location so you can refer to it as you read this primer If you do not have a keyboard template see the person responsible for installing the TEN PLUS system Your Home Directory The first screen you see when you log in to the system is usually your home directory You can think of your home directory as a master list or index of the information you are storing on the com puter A directory is similar in function to a file cabinet a file cabinet has several drawers each of which can contain many fold ers each holding one or more documents This is very useful for organizing your files Your home directory can contain subdirectories folders that hold related files documents and other subdirectories For ex
300. th of the window In such cases only part of the width appears on the display at any one time and also allow you to type text such as a statistical chart that is wider than the window You may even set a right hand margin ENTER MARGIN that is wider than the window The window in this case automatically scrolls right and left as the system word wraps the text Like the other scrolling functions and accept numeric arguments when used in conjunction with ENTER For example to scroll the window 50 columns to the right use 50 RIGHT To return the window to its original position in lieu of repeatedly using LEFT use 50 LEFT Any number greater than 50 will work as well This exercise demonstrates the procedures for moving windows TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 31 1 Use RIGHT to move the window so that you can see the text extending beyond the right hand window border 2 Use to move the window back to its original position Use ENTER 50 RIGHT to move the window 50 columns to the right st a few short hours It s so fast and heavily on personnel and ystem will speed 11 as you requested John y is a great theme but young company like conference room setting ient deserves something as Still using photography h one prop against a white n standing behind a A half a dozen or more booth waiting for their g their checkbooks usr larry report INSERT Line 4 Use ENTER 50 to re
301. that application Either the application was not installed properly or the search paths specified in the Editor Search Paths section of your edi tor profile are incorrect Action Make sure that the Editor Search Paths sec tion of your editor profile includes a separate line specifying SYS hmgs as a search path If this line is specified correctly and this message displays con tact your system administrator Cannot format ina list field Cause You have used FORMATI in a field with a tree data path that is an indexed field FORMAT can be used only in fields having text data paths Action No action required Cannot go to next item ina list of files Cause You have used NEXT while at the top level of a file works only when you have used ZOOM IN in a structured file having tree data paths Action to the file if possible then try to use NEXT Cannot go to next item of this list Cause You have used NEXT when there is no next item in the list Action ZOOM IN or ZOOM OUT if possible then try to use NEXT TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 51 Cannot go to previous item in a list of files Cause You have used while at the top level of a file PREVIOUS only works when you have used ZOOM IN in a structured file having tree data paths Action ZOOM IN to the file if possible then try to use PREVIOUS Cannot go to previous itemof this list Cause You have used PREVIOUS
302. that your termi nal is correctly configured to support the TEN PLUS User Interface The characteristics of each terminal must be established and made accessible to TEN PLUS Your system is delivered with a number of predefined terminal types This section explains how to set the terminal type on your system using a currently supported terminal configuration see 3 2 3 2 Determining Your TERM Variable A default terminal type is usually established for you when the sys tem is installed You may determine the default terminal type on your system by typing echo TERM at the system prompt The system displays the value of the TERM variable on your system Your screen will look similar to this AT386 If TERM is not set the system will simply return the prompt If you are using the standard AT console the TERM variable should be assigned atcon or AT386 as its value These two values are synonymous and can be typed in either upper or lower case If you are not using a standard AT console or if no TERM variable is set you must assign the TERM variable the correct value 3 3 Setting Your TERM Variable If all the users on your system are using the same terminal type you may set the terminal variable for the entire system by adding the following two lines to the file etc profile TERM termvariable export TERM where termvariable is replaced by the variable name of your termi nal The table below lists all of the valid te
303. the cursor position 3 12 Renaming Directories Directories are renamed from the File Manager screen by position ing the cursor at the appropriate character in the directory name and using any of the editing functions for modifying text For example change into overwrite mode by using INSERT MODE type over the old directory name and any extra characters 3 13 Removing Directories Directories are removed from the File Manager screen by position ing the cursor in any field on the line on which the directory is listed and using DELETE The directory and the entire structure files and directories below it is removed from the File Manager screen and stored in HOME putdir You can also remove multiple directories using or vertical motion with DELETE To restore a directory from HOME putdir use PICK COPY access the desired directory then use PUT DOWN 3 14 Using LOCAL MENU With the File Manager LOCAL MENU is used with the File Manager to display hidden files such as HOME putdir It is also used to return to the normal display without hidden files and to display and edit additional file attributes such as file permissions and ownerships 10 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 4 THE HISTORY DISPLAY This section explains how to use the History Display to recreate a previous version of a structured file 4 1 Accessing the History Display The History Display is accessed while editing a
304. the left of text already on a line the existing text moves to the right 4 When the text reaches the bottom of the screen the window scrolls to allow continuous typing Continue typing the rest of the paragraph 1 t t t as dynamic as their product I recommend a less conservative approach although still using photography rather than illustrations I envision a scene with one prop against a white background Prominent in the picture is a salesman standing behind a tradeshow booth on which appears a sign Buy Here A half a dozen or more business people are crowded around in front of the booth waiting for their turns to buy They re writing out checks or waving their checkbooks impatiently The salesman is taking orders and checks as fast as he can life should be so good This I believe is more consistent with the image we want and certainly has the impact we re looking for usr larry report INSERT Line Note that the symbol appears below the window to indicate that there is text above the text that is visible in the window The v 10 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 symbol indicates that there is text below what appears in the win dow The gt symbol indicates that text extends to the right of the window and the lt symbol indicates that text extends to the left of the window On some systems a different set of symbols may be used to indicate text extending beyond the window borders 2 5 Using the Cursor and
305. the option to create a structured file If a profiles directory does not already exist in your home directory one will be created After a brief pause the top level of the print profile will appear on the display Print Options ZOOM IN to see more detail about command Description shown in menu Command Print on default printer Print ask for options lp ts FILE lp Print options SFILE i i Print to file overwrite gt Print to file append gt gt Note that your system may utilize a different print command Check with your system administrator or refer to your user s manual for the correct command to insert in your menu TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 11 3 2 The Top Level of the Print Profile The top level of the print profile has two fields Description shown in menu and Command The Description shown in menu field is used to enter the description that displays on the menu when is used The Command field is used to enter print output instructions Four types of entries can be entered in the Command field UNIX System Commands Pipe Commands 1 Redirect and Overwrite Commands gt Redirect and Append Commands gt gt The first column in the Command field can contain a pipe symbol 1 a redirect symbol gt or gt gt or a UNIX System command If the first column contains a pipe symbol the output is piped through the specified program If the first column contains a redirect symbol the output
306. the specified number of windows forward or backward within the file rather than the one window default RIGHT Moves the window one third of its width to the LEFT right or left to permit viewing text that is off the display 10 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 ENTER ENTER Moves the window the specified number of characters to the right or left rather than the default number of characters ENTER SEARCH ENTER SEARCH Puts the string of characters beginning at the cursor position and ending at the first blank space in the search buffer and initiates a for ward or backward search ENTER string SEARCH ENTER string j SEARCH Puts string in the search buffer and initiates a forward or backward search SEARCH Searches forward or backward for the SEARCH current contents of the search buffer GO TO Moves the cursor to line 1 of the file If the cursor is at line 1 moves the cursor to the last line of file ENTER GO TO Moves the cursor to the last line of the file ENTER n GO TO Moves the cursor to the specified line in the file 3 CURSOR POSITIONING FUNCTIONS LF RETURN gt a gt c Cursor positioning functions Used in conjunc tion with BOX MARK and TEXT MARK and the text manipulation functions INSERT PICK UP DELETE and PICK COPY to define a specific area of text Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next line
307. ting new ones 1 With the cursor at the left hand margin use ENTER MARGIN 2 to the first tab stop then use ENTER j 3 to the eighth tab stop then use MARGIN 20 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 3 4 Readjusting Lines on New Margins is used to adjust lines according to a new margin setting When is used the lines from the cursor position to the next blank line are adjusted according to the current margin settings To readjust lines within new margins l the beginning of your file 2 Position the cursor on the first line of the second paragraph One or more text lines followed by a blank line are considered to be a paragraph 3 Use FORMAT Note that FORMAT does not change the indentation of the first line of the paragraph Move the line to the new margin by using the space bar 4 Use FORMAT to fill the text again 1 t t Preliminary report by Pat As you can see I got the hang of the system right away It s so fast and easy I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past not so reliable either I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but the visuals are just too stuffy for a progressive young company like QuikSell Corp The photo of business people in a conference room setting doesn t have the impact we re looking for this client deserves somethin
308. ting or a new file NEXT WINDOW Changes the current window in the order in which windows were created 6 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 ENTER WINDOW Z X PREVIOUS ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT Removes all windows except the one in which the cursor currently resides Displays the next item in a list Displays the previous item in a list Displays more detailed information Displays more summary information 7 EXIT SAVE FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES EXIT E B ENTER q o e zi Exits the TEN PLUS environment and returns to the command level saving the exited file as created or revised Abnormally terminates the editing session attempting to save all files produces a core file and should be used only if EXIT fails Exits the editor and cancels all changes made to all ASCII files during the current editing session unless they have been explicitly SAVE d Saves a file without exiting the editor Each SAVE creates a new bak file overwriting the previous bak file Ll TEN PLUS Reference Manual CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Accessing TEN PLUS Functions TEN PLUS SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2 1 Components and Capabilities 2 1 1 The INed Editor The File Manager The Profile Helper The Print Helper The History Display File Types Initializing the TEN PLUS System Exiting the TEN PLUS Environment FILE MANAGER Creating Files Exiting Files Accessing Existi
309. tion and global replacement File Manager The TEN PLUS File Manager allows users to create access move copy and delete files The File Manager uses the same functions as the INed editor Files are picked up and moved or copied and moved using the same INed functions that perform these operations on lines of text The File Manager is easy to use because there are no UNIX commands to remember Profile Helper The TEN PLUS Profile Helper allows users to customize the editing environment to suit individual needs It can be used to help the editor locate forms helpers messages and forms language scripts as well as to add change or delete the options on certain menus The Profile Helper uses forms to build custom menus that simplify operations in the TEN PLUS environment Custom menus allow the user to perform routine tasks by selecting options from menus Print Helper The TEN PLUS Print Helper allows users to print a file by selecting an option from the Print Menu The options on the Print Menu can be customized by editing the print profile Like the Profile Helper the Print Helper uses forms to build the custom Print Menu The custom Print Menu simplifies printing operations in the TEN PLUS Introduction to the TEN PLUS User Interface Release 2 2 5 environment by giving the user a choice of menu options for printing a file History Display The TEN PLUS History Display provides a way to keep track of changes made to st
310. tions 27 ASCII file 4 ASCII file saving 5 17 automatic recovery 35 BACKSPACE 18 20 27 backup procedures 3 35 bak file 5 17 35 BEGIN LINE 12 27 29 blocks designating 28 box characters 45 boxes removing 15 BOX MARK 28 BOX LINE 28 BREAK 14 22 31 33 CANCEL 15 27 canceling a filter 31 33 canceling a search 22 canceling an argument 27 canceling operations 14 cat filter 34 CENTER 28 33 centering text 33 character deleting 20 character inserting 18 components User Interface 2 control character inserting 24 control characters in text files 36 copying a directory 8 copying a file 6 copying a line 28 copying a sentence 29 creating adirectory 7 creating a file 6 creating a subdirectory 7 current window 23 cursor definition of 18 cursor moving 12 cursor defined argument 28 29 cursor defined argument multiple page 29 cursor positioning functions 11 cursor positioning functions with ENTER 27 date and time filter 34 INDEX DELETE 25 28 deleted text retrieving 20 25 DELETE CHARACTER 20 27 deleting a character 20 deleting afile 7 deleting a line 28 deleting a sentence 29 deleting a string 32 deleting remainder of line 20 deleting windows 23 designating a line 28 detail controlling 15 directory accessing 8 directory copying 8 directory creating 7 directory moving 9 directory removing 9 directory renaming 9 directory restoring 9 display redrawing 25 dividi
311. tions of fonts If for example you select word underscore font while the nonunderscore font is active you switch between nonunderscored text and word underscored text each time you use FONT If you select the word underscore font while the continuous underscore font is active you switch between word underscoring and continuous underscoring each time you use FONT Remember you can always return to the default nonun derscore font by using FONT It is important for you to feel comfortable using the techniques you have just learned Do this exercise to be sure you know how to use all of these facilities 1 Use ENTER to return to nonunderscore font then ZOOM OUT of your file 2 Create a new file named memo Practice typing text in the various fonts When you are accus tomed to switching between the various fonts enter some text as follows a Insert a centered underscored title b Typeone paragraph using the default margins c Indent the left and right hand margins and type another paragraph d Underline some of the text as you are typing e Change the margins back to their original setting Change the tab stops and type a chart TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 25 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES The previous sections explained how to create type and format files This section shows how to revise or edit files These functions are used when making revisions DELETE CHARACTER Deletes characters
312. to move the cursor down the remaining number of lines to be inserted 3 Use INSERT The cursor returns to its original position and blank lines are available for input Practice inserting lines using BOX MARK 38 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Use LINE Position the cursor on line 39 and use BOX MARK Use to move the cursor six lines down Use INSERT Seven blank lines are inserted in the text BOwOM 1 t t t t t t He couldn t care less about how long the home will last He wants a lifestyle and a low down payment I say we go with a headline that expands this message such as Our long list of standard features will raise your Standard of living more than you ever thought possible for just 1 500 down I ll buy two for my kids right now As you can see so far things are going well I got the hang of the system in just a few short hours It is so easy to use I find it hard to believe I used to rely so heavily on personnel and paper in the past I can already tell that this system will speed things up immensely Preliminary comments from Larry usr larry report INSERT Line 5 Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line and type the new text as shown below TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 39 He couldn t care less about how long the home will last He wants a lifestyle and a low down payment I say we go with a headline that expands this message such as Our long list of
313. to remove the popup box In the typos file position the cursor at the first typographi cal error listed then use SEARCH This places the typographical error in the search buffer If the typograph ical error is listed in the typos file only once the system responds Search failed on string string The typo graphical error remains in the search buffer Switch to your original file with or NEXT WINDOW then use and to locate the search string Continue searching until the system responds with Search failed on string string Repeat this procedure until all typographical errors are corrected Use this procedure to check the spelling in the report file ENTER spell report gt typos MENU Find and correct any errors TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 103 8 7 Printing a Document Documents created with the INed editor can be printed on a variety of devices by using PRINTJ PRINT produces a reproduction of a file exactly as it is displayed on line regardless of how much is visi ble on the screen when PRINT is used PRINT can also be used to print a directory listing by using PRINT while the listing is displayed To print a document l Access the file or directory to be printed 2 Use PRINT A menu similar to this one appears on the Screen INTERACTIVE TEN PLUS FILE MANAGER Move the cursor to an item below and ZOOM IN to see it File Description 1988 cal Calendar Print Helpe
314. to specify your choice of options MENU Options HELP Options Files the Editor Should Watch Editor Search Paths Additional profile options may be present depending upon the configuration of your system You can explore the profile by using ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT and the cursor positioning functions TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 3 2 3 MENU Options If you ZOOM IN to the first option MENU Options you will see a screen that looks like this MENU Options Description shown in menu Type Name of file or program Show home directory file HOME Execute UNIX shell commands Screen echo Touch CNTL D to continue ed Run a shell command in a box popbox Shell command Show your profiles directory file HOME profiles Edit your editor profile file HOME profiles editorprf Housekeep popbox housekeep Display history of current file helper history Note that you can use RIGHT to see additional text in the Name of file or program field This screen is used to determine what the New Task Menu which is displayed by MENU will look like Each line corresponds to one line of the New Task Menu Sample text menu entries can be found by using and selecting the Suggestions for Your MENU option If you do not know how to set up a menu entry you should look at the suggestions to get some ideas on how it is usually done The best way to get started is to use to pick up some of the lines and then use to put them in you
315. to the time that the his tory was removed will no longer be available 10 3 Automatic Recovery In situations such as power failure or storage exhaustion the editor saves the current editor session Text characters entered after the last editing command however are lost The recovery is automatic and in most situations the user does not need to take action If possible the editor restarts itself If the editor cannot restart type e and press the ENTER key The state the file was in prior to the session in which the problem occurred is restored 36 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 11 MISCELLANEA 11 1 Text File Format If a line is not explicitly modified during an editing session it remains unchanged If it is modified certain changes are made When files are read by the editor existing ASCII tab characters are maintained in the text even though they appear as spaces in the display until a line is modified When a line is modified all tabs are converted into spaces Then when a file is saved leading spaces are replaced with ASCII tab characters wherever possible that is each string of eight spaces is replaced by a single tab character Spaces after the first nonblank character are not replaced trailing blanks are removed If the last line of a file is not terminated by the new line character octal 012 a new line character is supplied when that line is edited All control characters other than tab Ctr1 i and
316. tom of the screen while typing TEN PLUS automatically scrolls the text forward so that you always have a place for the next line When you are reading a document you can scroll text forward up one screen at a time by using PAGE or one third of a screen at a time by using LINE Similarly you can use and to scroll text backward down TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 33 structured file A special type of file available in the TEN PLUS environment TEN PLUS keeps information about struc tured files that allows you to look at previous versions of those files word wrap A feature that eliminates the need for you to use at the end of each line When a word you are typing extends past the right hand margin the entire word is moved to the left hand margin of the next line A TEN PLUS Primer Release 2 2 Slash character 4 alternate file establishing 24 arrow keys cursor positioning 4 ASCII file 6 BACKSPACE function 4 BEGIN LINE function 22 BREAK function 23 CANCEL function 8 changing margins 22 changing tabs 22 copying directories 14 copying files 14 copying text 13 creating a document 5 creating directories 9 cursor 3 cursor moving to beginning of line 22 cursor moving to end of line 22 cursor positioning functions 4 deleting directories 14 deleting files 14 description field 3 directory copying 14 directory creating 9 directory deleting 14 directory editing 11 directory home 2 director
317. top of the Forms field and type a directory name for example HOME forms This tells the editor to look for a directory named forms under your login directory before it checks the stan dard system directory You can then put your own forms or per PN sonalized versions of the standard editor forms in your own forms directory and the editor will automatically use these This pro cedure also is used to make your own helper message and script directories 10 TEN PLUS Profiles Release 2 2 3 THE PRINT PROFILE The standard Print Menu includes four options Print on default printer Print ask for options Print to file overwrite Print to file append The Print Helper invoked by using PRINT creates a temporary file that represents a combination of the text on the screen and the form through which that text is viewed also utilizes the data in the print profile to generate a menu of options describing how the temporary file is processed Typically the temporary file is stored in another file for subsequent disposition or is output to a printing device You can include additional menu options by modifying the print profile file printprf located in the profiles directory Sample print profile entries can be found by selecting the option Suggestions for Print Menu option from the Help Menu 3 1 Creating Your Print Profile To create X your print profile file use ENTER HOME profiles printprf USE and select
318. turn the window to its original position 5 Move the cursor to the first line of the paragraph beginning with As you can see and use FORMAT Note that the text beyond the window border is now wrapped within the right hand margin 4 5 Deleting or Moving Lines There are two ways to delete lines from a file and PICK UP Us DELETE if you wish to remove a line per manently Use if you plan to put the line down some where else A line that has been picked up with and has not been or copied has effectively been deleted Note that you can recover DELETE d lines with RESTORE 32 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 4 5 1 Using DELETE DELETE removes the line containing the cursor adds it to the wastebasket buffer and moves the remaining lines up To recover text deleted the last time DELETE was used use RESTORE RESTORE removes text from the wastebasket buffer and replaces it in the file Text that has not been RESTORE d remains in the buffer Practice moving or deleting lines using DELETE 1 Use DELETE CHARACTER to delete the phrase It s so fast and easy beginning on the third line then use DELETE to delete the line beginning As you can see 2 Use i DELETE to remove the next four lines The screen should now look like this Preliminary report by Pat I have reviewed all copy and ad designs for QuikSell as you requested John and I agree that QuikSell Makes the Hard Sell Easy is a great theme but
319. umeric keypad TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 keyboard c o sz U Alt z on the main keyboard Alt 5 on the numeric keypad Alt Ins on the numeric keypad Enter on the right of the main keyboard or to the right of the numeric keypad Alt r on the main keyboard Alt s on the main keyboard Alt 2 on the numeric keypad Alt 8 on the numeric keypad Alt v on the main keyboard Tab l on the left of the main keyboard Shift Tab lc on the left of the main Alt t on the main keyboard Alt u on the main keyboard Alt w on the main keyboard F9 on the top row of keys ZOOM OUT F 10 on the top row of keys 8 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 3 AT 3 1 The AT Keyboard Figure 2 shows the AT keyboard layout and function locations for ran the TEN PLUS system CN nm ou FORMAT INSERT To invoke a function indicated by 77 hold down the Alt key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by hold down the Shift key and touch the designated key at the same time To invoke a function indicated by hold down the Ctrl key and touch the designated key at the same time Figure 2 AT Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System ZZ eseojou uoieuuojuj pzeog ey SNTd NIL 10 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 3 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the AT Keyboard Functions are accessed in one of five ways on the AT terminal l Touch the defined k
320. umerically It is used from the editor via and DO The sort command acts on one paragraph unless otherwise specified The system interprets a blank line following text to be a paragraph separator To sort a column place the cursor on the first line to be sorted and use sort DO To sort only a given number of lines indicate the number of lines followed by the letter 1 For example to sort ten lines use 101 sort DO Lists can be sorted on specific columns if each entry within a column is preceded by the same number of blank characters To sort a specific column type the number of columns to be skipped preceded by a after the sort command For example to sort the third column use sort 2 DO The b option is used to instruct the system to 100 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 ignore leading blanks and tabs For example use ENTER sort b 2 DO To sort a numeric column insert n anywhere on the command line For example use sort b n 2 DO For a discussion of more advanced sorting techniques refer to sort 1 Type some text to be sorted and practice the variations of sort that apply to your work 8 5 Performing Global Search and Replace The global search and replace command rp 1 is used on text files to replace a word or string of words with another word or string of words throughout a line paragraph or document Like the sort command it is used through the editor via ENTER command and acts on one para
321. use EXECUTE The window is removed and the editor subshell prompt displays The cursor is positioned after the prompt 3 Type passwd then press the ENTER key These prompts ensure that only the user can change the password and that there are no errors in setting the new password Old password New password Re enter new password 4 Enter the old password then the new password then reenter the new password Remember that you must press the ENTER key after each entry before typing the next If an incorrect old password is given the system responds Sorry and the editor subshell prompt returns To change your password you must reenter the passwd 1 command and press the ENTER key If there is an error when typing in the new password the sys tem responds with They don t match try again and prompts for the new password The new password should be entered and then reentered as prompted 8 11 Recovering From System Crashes The INed editor automatically recovers an editing session if the sys tem crashes while the session is in progress The next time the file is accessed it should be in the same state as it was when the system crashed Although automatic recovery is part of the editing system it is recommended that files be SAVE d periodically as an extra precau tion in case of failure If the recovery process fails the file can be accessed as it was when it was last SAVE d by editing the bak file The mes
322. use user2 s home directory is located above your current location the quiksell directory In our example the full path name to user2 s home directory is usr user2 To move to that directory use ENTER usr user2 5 8 2 Parent Directories A parent directory is the directory located immediately above your current directory You can use ENTER to change from a directory to its parent directory a6 moves you one level up in the directory structure For example you can move from the quiksell directory to its parent directory larry with the sequence USE The two dots take the place of the parent directory name Practice the sequences TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 65 ENTER directoryname and ENTER USE to move back and forth between the quikse11 directory and its parent direc tory Because the quiksell directory and its parent directory are now the current and alternate files respectively you can move between them with USE Note that you can create a new directory or file with filename by providing the system with a name for a new directory or file The system will display a popup box asking you to choose the type of file you wish to create Select the appropriate option to create the directory or file Use to remove the popup box without creating a directory or file 5 9 Removing Directories You can remove a directory just as you remove a file with either or DELETE It is suggested that you us
323. using The editor will try to restart the application so that you can continue editing Action If the application does not restart contact your system administrator File filename has not been modified Cause You are attempting to save file filename but it has not been modified so there is no need to save it Action No action required File filename is not a text or structured file Cause You are attempting to edit a binary file The editor is not capable of doing this Action Specify an ASCII or structured file and edit it File path tofile is not a directory Cause You have tried to edit a file however the path to the file included a component that was not a directory If this error occurred while using MENU then some files have not been installed correctly Action Specify a correct path If this error occurred while using MENU contact your system administrator Filter error on command command Cause The filter that you just ran has failed It should have printed its own error message Action Determine the cause of the error and try again Filter stopped by BREAK Cause You have used BREAK after using DO BREAK stopped the editor from completing the execution of and caused this message to display Action No action required 56 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Function key function has no special meaning for this data Cause You have used a function that is no
324. usr larry report INSERT Line 5 46 v 3 Position the cursor on the third line and use FORMAT Note that all lines in the paragraph are joined 4 8 Defining Rectangular Areas Using BOX MARK It is possible to use the cursor positioning functions to cursor define a rectangular area to be moved inserted deleted or copied Copy ing is covered later in this tutorial Cursor defining is used exten sively to move or duplicate words columns lines or paragraphs 36 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 Note that you can use CANCEL or ENTER to cancel a BOX MARK sequence at any time before completion To cursor define and then move a rectangular area l Position the cursor at the beginning of the area to be defined and use BOX MARK A indicator appears on the character under the cursor depending on the display the indicator may consist of highlighting blinking or the replace ment of the character under the cursor by a graphics charac ter Also x BOX LINE x appears below the win dow on the left hand side of the display Use the cursor positioning functions to define the area to be affected Words lines or columns can be cursor defined To define complete lines use to move the cursor down through the area to be affected Use or to scroll for ward if the area extends beyond the display To define partial lines use to move the cursor across the area to be defined Note that when you define and a
325. ved to the first character in that occurrence of the string If the string is in the window in which the search is initiated the cursor moves directly to the string If the string is not in the window where the search is initiated the window advances in the file to bring the line containing the search string to a position several lines down from the top of the window If the string is not found between the cursor position and the end of the file the message search failed on string string appears in a box and the window and cursor 22 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 positions remain unchanged When a search string is located in a column past the right hand boundary of the editing window the window moves to the right to display the string without an argument searches for the previous search string An error message displays if a search has not yet been ini tiated during the editing session uses the text at the cursor position up to the first blank space or the end of the line as the search string SEARCH functions as SEARCH does but SEARCH searches backward in the file starting at the character immediately preceding the cursor 7 10 Canceling a Search BREAK A search can be canceled with BREAK 6 1 This causes the message Stopped by BREAK to appear in a box on the display The cursor and window positions are not changed when BREAK is used 7 11 Searching and Replacing REPLACE ENTER string REPLA
326. ween the margins ENTER n CENTER centers n lines of text beginning with the cursor line ENTER vertical motion CENTER centers all lines within the cursor defined area between the margins If margins are subsequently changed centered lines are not automatically recentered 9 6 Selecting Fonts FONT Each file has a current and alternate font associated with it The default current font is Roman with no underline the default alter nate font is Roman with continuous underline switches the editor between the current and alternate fonts saves the current font as the alternate font and sets the current font to Roman with no underline letter saves the current font as the alternate font and sets the current font as specified by letter The acceptable values for letter are r Roman c continuous underline w word underline and g graphics characters The graphics character set is described in Appendix C ENTER FONT tells you which fonts are available and which font is currently in use 9 7 Canceling a Filter Operation BREAK A filter operation can be interrupted with 86 1 leaves the file and window positions unchanged It does not undo the operation if it completes prior to using BREAK 9 8 More DO Capabilities tee cat sort and date Your system includes a variety of text processing programs suitable for use with DO Refer to your user s manual for additional infor mation about specific programs
327. when there is no previous item in the list Action ZOOM IN or ZOOM OUT if possible then try to use PREVIOUS Cannot join in indexed field Cause You have used either ENTER PICK UP or DELETE to combine two lines while in a field with a tree data path that is an indexed field ENTER PICK UP and DELETE can be used only in fields with text data paths Action To join the lines use pick and put operations in con junction with BOX MARK and the horizontal and or vertical cursor positioning functions Cannot open form form Cause X Either you have used in a field for which the editor can find no zoom form or you have used the Change form menu option to specify a form that the editor cannot find If the editor cannot find a zoom form the form may be installed in the wrong place If this message displayed when you used MENU you may have specified an invalid form name Action If this error displayed while you were trying to to a field in a form check the Editor Search Paths section of your editor profile if necessary contact your system administrator If this error displayed while using the Change form menu option provide a valid form name to the option 52 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Cannot open output file filename Cause You have tried to edit filename but the editor is unable to open it Either you do not have permission to create the file or directory you have specified
328. without having to the TEN PLUS Environment Used in conjunction with to choose menu options command places the output of command in a popup box PRINT Accesses a print menu LAST ARG Displays the last ENTER popup box argument OB BN TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 109 QUOTE Allows the explicit insertion of control charac ters into the text REFRESH Clears the editor window of garbage charac ters or broadcast messages Use REFRESH to rewrite the editor window and position the cur sor as it was before the interruption ENTER REFRESH If TEN PLUS is running in a windowing environment that supports windows use ENTER REFRESH to rewrite the editor window using the new window size FUNCTIONS Displays a menu listing which of the ten basic TEN PLUS functions are active p LOCAL MENU Displays the local data specific task menu 1 8 Local menu bypass functions 2 WINDOW POSITIONING FUNCTIONS AND SEQUENCES Moves the text one third of a window forward or backward within the file n n Moves the text the specified number of lines for ward or backward within the file rather than the one third window default fele i zi EE zz FIS elles ENTER LINE Moves the cursor line to the top or the bot ENTER LINE tom of the window PAGE Moves the text one window forward or PAGE backward within the file ENTER n PAGE ENTER n Moves the text
329. working up some new copy for the campaign We should meet with the following people before the end of the week usr larry report INSERT Line 39 60 v 4 15 Inserting Moving Deleting and Duplicating a Specific Number of Lines A simple way to blank lines when inserting a block of text is to use a numeric argument specifying the number of lines to be inserted Excess blank lines can be DELETE d after typing the insertion Numeric arguments can also be used when moving deleting or duplicating a specific number of lines To insert move delete or duplicate a specific number of lines 1 Use ENTER 2 Type a numeric argument indicating the number of lines to be affected 3 Use INSERT PICK UP DELETE or PICK COPY If this method is used to PICK COPY DELETE or PICK UP lines PUT COPY RESTORE or PUT DOWN can be used to move or copy the lines Practice using ENTER with a numeric argument to delete a specific number of lines 1 Use LINE 2 Position the cursor at the W in We on line 54 TEN PLUS Tutorial Release 2 2 47 Use ENTER 4 Typethe number 7 Use DELETE The seven lines beginning with the cursor line are removed from the file and stored in the wastebasket buffer Larson Pantages Sternig Winkler Preliminary comments from Larry After a brief review of the accounts it Seems to me Pat s insight and recommendations are all valid I ll begin
330. y moving 14 editing directories 11 editing files 11 END LINE function 22 entering TEN PLUS Environment 2 file alternate 24 file ASCII 6 file copying 14 file creation 5 file deleting 14 file editing 11 file field 3 file moving 14 file name characters 4 file name full 4 file name size 3 file structured 6 FORMAT function 15 formatting text 15 full file name 4 functions cursor positioning 4 getting help 8 HELP function 8 home directory 2 INSERT function 15 INSERT MODE function 23 inserting space for new text 15 inserting text 23 interrupting a search 23 keyboard template 2 LEFT function 22 LOCAL MENU function 19 loggingin 2 margins changing 22 35 INDEX MENU function 18 menus removing 8 menus using 18 LINE function 7 PAGE function 7 SEARCH function 23 TAB function 4 moving directories 14 moving files 14 moving screen to left 22 moving screen to right 22 moving text 11 New Task Menu 18 OVERWRITE function 23 overwriting text 23 password 2 PICK COPY function 13 PICK UP function 11 LINE function 7 PAGE function 7 SEARCH function 23 popup boxes removing 8 PRINT function 24 printing documents 24 PUT COPY function 13 PUT DOWN function 11 RIGHT function 22 scrolling 7 searching text 23 SET TAB function 22 slash 4 starting TEN PLUS 2 structured file 6 TAB function 4 tabs changing 22 tabs setting 22 TEN PLUS functions summary 26 text formatting
331. y K hold down the SHIFT key and touch the designated key at the same time Figure 8 AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 Keyboard Layout for the TEN PLUS System touch the ESC key release it zz eseejey uotjeunoju pseoghey SNTd NIL SY 46 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 9 2 TEN PLUS Functions on the AT amp T 5425 and AT amp T 4425 Keyboards Functions are accessed in one of four ways on AT amp T 5424 and AT amp T 4425 terminals l Touch the defined key For example FORMAT is invoked by touching F3 on the function keypad Hold down the CTRL key then touch the designated key For example BOX MARK is invoked by holding down CTRL then touching the b key Touch the ESC key release it then touch the designated key For example is invoked by touching ESC releasing it then touching the s key Hold down the SHIFT key then touch the designated key For example is invoked by holding down SHIFT then touching the TAB key Note that to invoke TEN PLUS functions on the left keypad the left keypad must be in Alternate Keypad mode To log out from the system level hold down the CTRL key while simultaneously touching d Function Keystrokes ESC then 1 on the main keyboard ESC then 2 on the main keyboard ESC then 3 on the main keyboard ESC then 4 on the main keyboard ESC then 5 on the main keyboard ESC then 6 on the main keyboard ESC then 7 on the main keyboard ESC then 8 on the ma
332. y for you to read this appendix if you are not a system programmer The INed editor is designed to operate on most ASCII video VDT or CRT terminals and on a number of personal computers The standard version of the editor uses data in the termcaps terminal description database to run the terminal Many terminals manufac tured have been described in this database Note that this appen dix applies only to those terminals that are used with the standard version of the editor Skip this appendix if your computer or termi nal does not use this version of the editor The termcap database is located in the file etc termcap The editor does not use this file directly but instead uses the file terms bin This file contains all the information in the termcap database as well as information about where the TEN PLUS func tion keys are located on the keyboard All of this information is stored in a binary form for use by the editor The file trm is an editable version of terms bin You can com pose it directly or use the program tconvert 1 to make trm from etc termcap If you produce trm from etc termcap the keyboard definition is taken from record 0 of SYS termcap def trm Figure 9 shows the relationship between these files All files other than etc termcap are located in the directory SYS termcap 52 TEN PLUS Keyboard Information Release 2 2 etc termcap Standard UNIX file describing characteristics of most popular ter
333. your system administrator before exiting the system Unable to restart helper helper Cause You have returned to an application that you were using earlier but the editor is unable to restart the helper Action Contact your system administrator To continue working with the file EXIT and reenter the file Warning cannot fix file modes of filename Cause The editor was attempting to use the chmod system call on filename The attempt failed The editor will continue to try to open and save the file Action If the file modes for the file are not those you desire use the chmod command to change them Warning write error on file filename Cause You have used filename SAVE In attempt ing to write data into filename the operating system encountered a disk write failure No further data will be written Action Determine the reason for the write failure correct it and try again You cannot modify this field Cause You are trying to modify a field that has read permis sion only this is not allowed Action No action required You cannot modify this file Cause You are attempting to type into or otherwise modify a file for which you do not have write permission 62 TEN PLUS Reference Manual Release 2 2 Action Change the permissions if you are allowed to do so and re edit the file You cannot put a text region ina list field Cause You have used TEXT MARK and the cursor position

INTERACTIVE UNIX System V/386 R3.2 Ten Plus User

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents